c 


lN:i?: 


o 


n 


O 


o 


cl 


THE  ONLY  COPY-RIGHT  EDI'l.,^, 


RIFL  E 


INFANTRY  TACTICS, 


REVISED  AND  IMPROVED 


Maj.  Gen.  W.  J.  HARDEE,  C.  S.  ARMY 


SEVENTH  EDITION. 

Vol.  II. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


MOBILE  : 

S.  G.  GOETZEL  &  CO. 


1S63. 


Entered,    according   to'  Act   of  Congress,  in  the  year  1861,  by 

S.  H.  GOETZEL  &  CO., 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Alabama,  for  the 
Confederate  States  of  America. 


NOTICE. 


1^"  So  many  editions  of  my  "  INFANTRY 
AND  RIFLE  TACTICS  "  having  lately  been 
published,  I  think  it  due  to  both  the  Public  and 
Publishers  to  state  : 

^  That  the  COPYRIGHT  EDITION  of  my 
INFANTRY  and  RIFLE  TACTICS,  published 

by  S.  H.  GOETZEL  &  CO.,  in 

Mobile,  is  the  only  COMPLETE,  CORRECT 
and  REVISED  EDITION,  and  Tins  edition 
ONLY  contains  the  improvements  and  changes 
which  I  have  recently  made,  adapting  the  manual 
to  the  use  of  the  arms  generally  in  the  hands  of 
the  troops  in  the  Confederate  States. 

W.  J.  HARDEE, 
Colonel  Confederate  States  Army. 
Fort  Morgan,  June  18th,  1861. 


Digitized  by  tlie  Internet  Arcliive 
in  2010  witli  funding  from 
Dul<e  University  Libraries 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/rifleinfantrytac2liard 


RIFLE  AND  mFANTRY  TACTICS. 


TITLE    FOURTH. 
SCHOOL    OF    THE  BATTALION. 

Formation  of  the  Battalion. 

1.  Every  colonel  will  labor  to  habituate  bis  bat- 
talion to  form  line  of  battle,,  by  night  as  well  as  by 
day,  with  the  greatest  possible  promptitude. 

2.  The  color  company  will  generally  be  designated 
as  the  directing  company.  That,  as  soon  as  formed, 
will  be  placed  on  the  direction  the  colonel  may  havo^ 
determined  for  the  line  of  battle.  The  other  compa- 
nies will  form  on  it,  to  the  right  and  left,  on  the  prin- 
ciples of  successive  formations  which  will  be  herein 
prescribed. 

3.  The  color-bearer  may  have  received  the  color 
from  the  hands  of  the  colonel ;  but  if  there  be  day- 
light, and  time,  the  color  will  be  produced  with  due 
solemnity 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color  escort. 

4.  "When  the  battalion  turns  out  under  arms  and 
the  color  is  wanted,  a  company   other  than  that  of 


6  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALI6n— PART  I. 

the  color,  will  be  put  iu  march  to  receive  iind  escort 
it. 

5.  The  II, arch  will  be  in  the  following  order,  in 
quick  time,  aiiJ  without  music  ;  the  field  music,  fol 
lowed  by  tb^  b'^^nd ;  the  escort  in  column  by  platoon,- 
ric'ht  in /I'ont,  with  arms  on  the  right  shoulder,  and 
tire  cc-^^i"-'>earer  between  the  platoons. 

6.  Arrived  in  front  of  the  tent  or  quarters  of  the 
colonel,  the  escort  will  form  line,  the  field  music  and 
band  on  the  right,  and  arms  will  be  brought  to  a 
shoulder. 

7.  The  moment  the  escort  is  in  line,  the  color-bear- 
er, preceded  by  the  first  lieutenant,  and  followed  by 
a  sergeant  of  the  escort,  will  go  to  receive  the  color. 

8.  When  the  color-bearer  shall  come  out,  followed 
by  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant,  he  will  halt  before  the 
entrance  ;  the  escort  will  present  arms,  and  the  field 
music  will  sound  to  the  color. 

9.  After  some  twenty  seconds  the  captain  will 
cause  the  sound  to  cease,  arms  to  be  shouldei'cd,  and 
then  break  by  platoon  into  column  ;  the  color-bearer 
will  place  himself  between  the  platoons,  and  the  lieu- 
tenant and  sergeant  will  resume  their  posts. 

10.  The  escort  will  march  back  to  the  battalion  to 
the  sound  of  music  iu  quick  time,  and  in  the  name 
order  as  above,  the  guide  on  the  right.  The  march 
will  be  so  conducted  that  when  the  escort  arrives  at 
one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front  of  the  right  of 
the  battalion,  the  direction  of  the  march  will  be  par- 
all  el  to  its  front,  and  when  the  color  arrives  neary 
opposite  its  place  in  line,  the  column  will  change  di- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  I.  7 

rectiou   to  the  left,  and  the  right  guide  will  direct 
himself  on  the  centre  of  the  battalion. 

Honors  paid  to  the  color. 

11.  Arrived  at  the  distance  of  twenty  paces  from 
the  battalion,  the  escort  will  halt,  and  the  music 
cease  ;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  six  paces  before 
the  centre  of  the  battalion,  the  color-bearer  will  "ap- 
proach the  colonel,  by  the  front,  in  quick  time  ;  when 
at  the  distance  often  paces,  he  will  halt:  the  colonel 
will  cause  arms  to  be  presented  and  to  the  color  to  be 
sounded,  which  being  executed,  the  color-bearer  will 
take  his  place  in  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guardj 
and  the  battali(»n,  by  command,  shoulder  ;irms. 

12.  The  escort,  field  music,  and  band,  will  return 
in  quick  time  to  their  several  places  in  line  of  battle, 
marching  by  the  rear  of  the  battalion. 

13.  The  color  will  be  escorted  back  to  the  colonel's 
tent  or  quarters  in  the  above  order. 

General  Rules  and  Division  of  the  School  of  the 

m 

Battalion. 

14.  This  school  has  for  its  object  the  instruction 
of  battalions  singly,  and  thus  to  prepare  them  for 
nwiiceuvres  in  line.  The  harmony  so  indispensable  in 
the  movements  of  many  battalions,  can  only  be  at- 
tained by  the  use  of  the  same  commands,  the  same 
principles,  and  tlie  same  means  of  execution.  Hence, 
all  colonels  and  actual  commanders  of  battalions  will 


3  SCHOOL  OF  THE  IJATTALION— PAirr  I. 

conform  themselves,  %vith(»ut  addition  or  curtailment, 
to  what  will  herein  be  prescribed. 

15.  When  a  battalion  instructed  in  this  drill  shall 
manoeuvre  in  line,  the  ct>l()nel  A\ill  legulate  its  move- 
ments, as  prescribed  in  the  third  volume  of  the  Tac- 
tics, for  heavy  infantry. 

16.  The  school  of  the  battalion  will  be  divided  into 
five  parts. 

.17.  The  first  will  comprehend  opening  and  closing 
ranks,  and  the  execution  of  the  ditlerent  fires. 


18.  The  second,  the  dilTereut  modes  of  passing  from 
the  order  in  battle,  to  the  order  in  column. 

19.  The  third,  the  march  in  column,  and  the  other 
movements  incident  thereto. 

20.  The  fourth,  the  different  modes  of  passing  from 
the  order  in  column  to  the  order  in  battle. 

21.  The  fifth  will  comprehend  the  march  in  line  of 
battle,  in  advance  and  in  retreat;  the  passage  of  de- 
files in  retreat  ;  the  march  by  tlie  flank  ;  the  forma- 
tion by  file  into  line  of  battle;  the  change  <if  front ; 
the  column  doubled  on  the  centre  ;  dispositions 
against  cavalry;  the  rally,  and  rules  for  manoeuvring 
by  the  rear  rank.  • 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  I.  H 

PART  FIRST. 

Opening  and  closing  ranks  and  the  execution  of  the 

different  fires. 

Article  First. 

To  open  and  to  close  ranks. 

22.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  ranks  to  be  opened, 
will  conimaiid  : 

1.  Prepare  to  open  ranks. 

23.  At  this  command,  the  lieu-tenant  colonel  and 
major  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  bat- 
talion, the  first  on  the  flank  of  the  tile  closers,  and 
the  second  four  paces  from  the  front  rank  of  the  bat- 
talion. 

24.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

2.    To  the  rear,  open  order.     3.  MARCH. 

25.  At  the  second  command,  the  covering  ser- 
geants, and  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion, 
will  place  themselves  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  front 
rank,  and  opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  in 
order  to  mark  the  new  alignment  of  the  rear  rank  ; 
they  will  be' aligned  by  the  major  on  the  left  sergeant 
of  the  battalion,  who  will  be  careful  to  place  himself 


10  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION- T^RT  I. 

exactly  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  and  to 
hold  his  piece  between  the  eyes,  erect  and  inverted, 
the  better  to  indicate  to  the  major  the  direction  to  be 
given  to  the  covering  sergeants. 

26.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  runk  and  the 
file,  closers  will  step  to  the  rear  without  counting 
steps ;  the  men  will  pass  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line 
traced  for  this  rank,  halt,  and  dress  forward  on  the 
covering  sergeants,  who  will  align  correctly  the  men 
of  their  respective  companies. 

27.  The  file  closers  will  fall  back  and  preserve  the 
distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  glancing 
eyes  to  the  right  the  lieutenant,  colonel  will,  from 
the  right,  align  them  on  the  file  closer  of  the  left, 
who,  having  placed  himself  accurately  two  paces  from 
the  rear  rank,  will  invert  his  piece  and  hold  it  up 
erect  between  his  eyes,  the  better  to  be  seen  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel. 


28.  The  colonel,  seeing  t^e  ranks  aligned,  will  com- 
mand : 

4.  Front. 


At  this  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel,  major, 
and  the  left  sergeant,  will  retake  their  places  in  line 
of  buttle. 

29.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  ranks  to  be  closed 
by  the  commands  prescribed  for  the  instructor  in  the 
school  of  the  company,  No.  2d. 


school  of  the  battalion— part  l         11 
Article  Second. 

Manual  of  Arms. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  colonel  will  cause 
the  following  times  and  pauses. to  be  executed: 

Present  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Order  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Unfix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Article  Third. 

Londing'at  will,  and  the  Firings. 

31.  The  colonel  will  next  cause  to  be  executed, 
loading  at  will,  by  the  commands  prescribed  in  th# 
school  of  the  company  No.  4">  ;  the  officers  and  ser- 
geants in  the  ranks  will  half  face  to  the  right  with 
the  men  at  the  eighth  time  of  loading,  and  will  face 
to  the  fi'ont  when  the  meu  next  to  them  come  to  a 
shoulder 

32.  The  colonel  will  cause  to  be  executed  the  fir§ 
by  company,  the  fire  by  wing,  the  fire  by  battalion, 
the  fire  by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands 
to  be  herein  indicated. 

33.  The  fire  by  company  and  the  fire  by  file  will 


12  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  L 

always  be  dU*ect ;  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by 
wing,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  may  be  either  direct  or 
oblique. 

34.  When  the  fire  ought  to  be  ob'ique,  the  colonel 
will  give,  at  every  round,  the  caution  right  (or  left) 
oblique,  between  the  commands  ready  and  aim. 

3&.  The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed  alter- 
nately by  the  right  and  left  companies  of  each  divi- 
sion, as  if  the  division  were  alone.  The  right  com- 
pany will  fire  first ;  the  captain  of  the  left  will  not 
give  his  first  command  till  he  shall  see  one  or  two  pie- 
ces at  a  ready  in  the  right  company;  the  captain  of  the 
latter,  after  the  first  discharge,  will  observe  the  same 
rule  in  respect  to  the  left  company ;  and  the  fire  will 
thus  be  continued  alternately. 

36.  The  coloiuel  will  observe  the  same  rule  in  the 
firing  by  wing. 

37.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  in  all  the  com- 
panies at  once,  and  will  be  executed  as  has  been  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  55  and  fol- 
lowing. The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each 
rank  alternately,  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company  No.  58  and  following. 

38.  The  color-guard  will  not  fire,  but  reserve  itself 
for  the  defence  of  the  color. 

The  Jive  by  company. 

39.  The  colonel  wishing  the  fire  by  company  to  be 
executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Firchy  comjyany.     2.   Commence  firing. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  L     13 

40.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  and  cover- 
ing sergeants  will  take  the  positions  indicated,  in  the 
school  of  the  company  No.  49. 

41.  The  color  and'its  guard  will  step  back  at  the 
same  time,  so  as  to  bring  the  front  rank  of  the  guard 
in  a  line  with  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion.  This 
rule  is  general  for  all  the  differejit  firings. 

42.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbered 
companies  will  commence  to  fire  ;  their  captains  will 
each  give  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  company  No.  50,  observing  to  precede  the  com- 
mand company  by  that  of  first,  third,  fifth,  or  seventh, 
according  to  the  number  of  each. 

43.  The  captains  of  the  even  numbered  com- 
panies will  give,  in  their  turn,  the  same  commands, 
observing  to  precede  them  by  the  number  of  their 
respective  companies. 

44.  In  order  that  the  odd  numbered  companies  may 
not  all  fire  at  once,  their  captains  will  observe,  but 
only  for  the  first  discharge,  to  give  the  command  fire 
one  after  another ;  thus,  the  captain  of  the  third 
company  will  not  give  the  command  fire  until  he  has 
heard  the  fire  of  the  first  company  ;  the  captain  of 
the  fifth  will  observe  the  same  rule  with  respect  to 
the  third,  and  the  captain  of  the  seventh  the  same 
rule  with  respect  to  the  fifth. 

45.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  fire  to  cease  by  the 
sound  to  cease  firing  ;  at  this  sound,  the  men  will 
execute  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany No.  63  ;  at  the  sound,  for  officers  to  take  their 
places  after  firing,  the  captains,  covering   sergeants, 


14  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  I. 

and  color-guard,  will  promptly  resuirie  tlieir  places  in 
line  of  battle  :  this  rule  is  general  for  all  the  firings. 

The  fire  by  tcing. 

4C.  When  the  evilonel  shall  wish  this  fire  to  be  exe- 
cuted, he  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  icing.     2.  Right  icing.     3.  READY. 
4.  AiJM.    5.  FiiiE.    6.  Load. 

47.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  wings  to  fire  alter- 
nately, and  he  will  recommence  the  tire  by  the  com- 
mands, ].  Right  tcing  ;  2.  AlM  ;  3.  FlRE  ;  4.  LoAD. 
1.  Left  wing;  2.  AlM;  3.  FiiiE  ;  4.  LoAD  ;  in  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed  No.  35. 

The  fire  by  battalion. 

48.  The  colonel  will  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed 
by  the  command!^  last  prescribed,  substituting  for 
the  first  two,  1.  Fire  by  battalion;  2.  Battalion. 

The  fire  by  file. 

49.  To  cause  this  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  Fire  by  file.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Ready. 

4.  Commence  firing. 

50.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  fire  will  commence 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  L  15 

on  the  right  of  each  company,  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company,  No.  57.  Th*e  colonel  may,  if 
he  thinks  proper,  cause  the  fire  to  commence  on  the 
right  of  each  platoon. 

The  fire  hy  rank 

51.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 


1.  Fire  hy  rank.  2.  Battalion.      3.  READY.     4.  Rear 
rank.     5.  Aoi.     6.  FiRE.     7.  Load. 

52.  This  fire  will  be  executed  as  has  been  ex- 
plained in  the  school  of  the  compaliy  No.  59,  in  fol- 
lowing the  progression  prescribed  for  the  two  ranks 
which  should  fire  alternately. 

To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

53.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  battalion  to 
fire  to  the  rear,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.      2.  Battalion. 

3.  About— Face. 

54.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains,  covering 
sergeants,  and  file  closers  will  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  No. 
69  ;  the  color-bearer  will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  and 
for  this  purpose,  the  corporal  of  his  file  will  step  be- 


16  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PA kT  I. 

fore  the  corporal  next  on  his  right  to  let  the  color- 
bearer  pass,  and  will  then  take  his  place  in  the  front 
rank;  the  lieutenant  colonel,  adjutant,  major,  ser- 
geant major,  and  tbe  music  will  place  themselves  be- 
fore the  front  rank,  and  face  to  the  rear,  each  oppo- 
site his  place  in  the  line  of  battle— the  first  two  pass- 
ing around  the  right,  and  the  others  antund  the  left 
of  the  battalion. 

55.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
about;  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants  observ- 
ing what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company 

No.  70. 

56.  The  battalion  facing  thus  by  the  rear  rank,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  different  fires  by 
the  same  commands  as  if  it  were  faced  by  the  front 
rank. 

57.  The  right  and  left  wings  will  retain  the  same 
designations,  although  ficed  about  r  the  companies 
also  will  preserve  their  former  designations,  as  first, 
second,  third,  &c.' 

58.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of 
each  company,  now  become  the  right. 

59.  The  fire  by  rank  will  commence  by  th^  front 
rank,  now  become  the  rear  rank.  This  rank  will 
preserve  its  denomination. 

60.  The  captains,  covering'  sergeants,  and  color- 
guard  will,  at  the  first  command  given  by  the  co- 
lonel, take  the  places  prescribed  for  them  in  the  fires, 
with  the  front  rank  leading. 

61.  The  colonel,  after  firing  to  the  rear,  wishing  to 
face  the  battalion  to  its  proper  front,  will  command  : 


^'CHOOL  OF  THK  BATTALION -PART  I.  17 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.     2.  Battalion.     3.  About 
Face. 

62.  At  these  commalids,  the  battalion  will  return 
to  its  proper  fi«out  by-the  iioeans-prescribed  "Nos.  54 
and  55. 

63.  The  fire  by  file  being  th^t  most  used  in  war, 
the  colonel  will  give  it  the  preference  in  the  prepara- 
tory exercises,  in  order -that  the  battalion  may  "be 
brought  to  execute-  it  with  the  greatest  possible  re- 
gHlarity. 

64.  When  the  colonel  may  wish'to  give  some  re- 
laxation to  the  battalion,  without  breaking  the  ranks, 
he  will  execute  wjiat-  has  been  prescribed  in  th^ 
school  of  the  colnp^ny  Nos.  37  and  38,  or.Nos!  39 
and  40.  4 

65.  When  thejcolonel  shall  wisli  to  cause  arms  to 
be  stacked,  he  will  bring  the  battalion  to  ordered 
arifis,  and* then  command: 

1.  Stack — Arms.     2.  Jircak  ranks.      3.  March." 

66.  The  colonel  wishing  the  men  to  return  to  the 
ran)is,  will  cause^  attention  to  be  sounded,  at  which 
the'battalion  will  re-foj-m  behind  the  stacks  of  arms. 
The  SDund  being  finished,  the  colonel,  after  -causing 
tiie  stacks  to  be  broken,  will  conijuand  : 

Battalion. 


18  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  U. 

"67.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  fix  -their  atten- 
tion, and  remain  immovable.' 

PART  SECOND. 

Diffctent  morhs  of  passing  frdm  the  order  in  battle  to 
the  order  in  column. 

Arjicle  First. 

To  break  Jo  the  right  or  left  into  column. 

68.  Lines  of  battle  will  babitiially  break  inio 
colnmii  by  company;  they  may  also  break  by  division 
or  by  platoon. 

.  69.  It  is  here  supposed  that  the  cdouel  wishes  to 
break  by  company  to  the  I'ight ;  ^le'will  command  : 

1.  By  company,  right  ichecl.      2.  March  (or  double 
quick— March).  . 

70.  At  the  first  commahd,.eaeh'  captain  •willplkce 
himself  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  his  company,  and 
caution  it  thnt  it  h;is  to  whegl  to  the  right ;  each  cov- 
ering sergeant  will  replace  his  captain  in  the  front 
rank. 

71.  At  the  command  march,  each  x'.ompnuy  will 
break  to  the  right,  according  to- the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  173;.  each 
captain  wilj,  confoini  himself  to  what  is  prescribed 
for  the  chiefs  of  platoon;  the  left  gnide,  as  soon  as 
ho  can  pass,  will  plivee  himself  on  j:he    left    of  the 


'JA. 


mmmr- 


HiiiiiiiiiiMttr 


Hiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiir 


SCHOOL  OF  THH  BATTALION— P^RT  II.  19 

front  rank  to  cnoiluet  the  iniirdijng  fljiiik,  and  vvheiL 
he  shall  have  'ajipfoaehed.ncar  to  the  q^erpendjculjjT, 
the  captain  •Mill  coniuicund  :  ].  Such  ccrmp any.  ^r 
Halt.. 

72.  At  the_^eco-nd  e;>iniTfaiid,  which  will'  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  left  jtnide  shall  beat  the  tHstinic^  of 
three  paces  from  the*perpendicuhtr,  the  compHuy 
will  halt ;  the  jjuide  will  advance  afiei*-|i]ace  his  ItAft 
arm  li^rhtly  against  the  hreast  of  the  ciplaiii,  who 
will  establish  hfrn  oii  tht3.;i,lii>nment  of  ttie;  man  who 
has  faced  to  the  right;  the* covering  sei;^eant  will 
place  himself  correctl^^  on  the  alignn^nt  on  the  right 
of  thai  man  ;  .wliich  being  executed,  the  c;tptfiin  will 
align  his  company  by  the  left^  command; Fii'oxT»  aud 
place  hitnself  two  paces  before  rts  centre'. 

73.  Th(i  captains  Iwiving  commanded  Front,  the 
gnides,  altlic>i|l;?h  some  (jT  "themynny  not  be  in  the  di- 
rection of  th*e  pi-eceding  guides,  will  stand  fast,  in 
order  that  the  err«r  of  ;t  c'ompany  that  haswheekd 
too  much  or  -too  little  mriy  nofc^lje  propagatf^d  ;  the 
guides  not  in  the  direction  will  readily  come  into  it 
when  the  colunm.is  put  iirmarch.   ; 

74.  A  battalion  in  liiie  of  battTe  will  break  irifo' 
column  by  company  to  the  \eft',  according  to  the  satne 
principles,  and  by  Inverse  jneans;  the  covering  set- 
geant  of  each -company -will' conduct  the  marching 
iiank,  and  the  left  gJiiAti  will  plage  himself  oa  the  left  of 
the  front  rank  at  fhe  moment  tire  oompaity  halts. 

75.  "When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division,  the  in- 
dication diiision  will  be  substituted  in  the  commands 
fit  that  oiQoiiipany  ;  the  chief  of  each  division  fthe 
senior  gaptmn)  will 'conform  himself  to  what  is  pre 


;iO  PCHQjOI-  of  THK  BATTALION— PART  11. 

scribed  for  th^  cl^ief. of  company,  andnvill  place  him- 
sejr  two  paces  before  the  (,'ent)«e  of  ly?  division;  the 
junior  c<'tptain,»jf  not  already  theuo,  vviH  place  Lim- 
self  in  the  interval  bet\Vee:i  tlie  two  companies  in 
the  front  rank,  and  be  ^vei-ed  by  the  covering  ser- 
geant of.  the  left  company  in  the  rcjir  rank.  The 
riglit  guide  of  the  rij^ht  company  wilf  be  the  right 
guide,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company,  the  left 
guides  of  the^ division. 

76.  \Vh^ii  the  battalion  shall  Jjreark  by  platoon  to 
the'right  pr  to  the  left,  each  first  lieutenant  will  i)ass 
arouii<i  the  left  of  his  company  to  place  liimself  in 
front  of  the  second  platoon,  and' for  tbis^purpose  each 
covering  sergeant,  except  the  one  of  th'e  righ£  com- 
p.'^n^-will  step,  for  the  moment,  in  rear,  of  the  right 
file  "of  his  company. 

77.  When  the  battalion  lireaks  by  division  to  the 
right,  and  there  is  an  odd  1:?t»nipan^,  thc*c-a|>tain  of 
this  company,  (the  left),  after  wliejjllng  into  column, 
will  causae  it  to  oblique  to  the  left,  hafltvit  at  company 
distance  from^  the  preceding  division,  place  his  left 
guide  on  the  direction  of  the  coluum,  and  then  "align 
his  company  by  the  left.  When  tfie  line  breaks  by 
division  to  the  left,  the  odd  company  will  be  in  front; 
its  captain,  having  wheeled  it  iuto.column,  Will  cause 
it  to  oblique  to  the  right,  halt.it  at  division  distance 
from  the  division  next  in  the  rear,  ])lace  his  right 
guide  on  the  directioit  of  the  other  guides,  and  align 
the  compt^ny  by  the  right. 


78.  The  battalion  being  in  ctdumn,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  major  will-place  them^elveti.  i)n  the  .di 
rectiug  flank,  the  first  abreast  witli  the  'leading  sub- 


SCHOOb  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II.  01 

division,  and  the  other  abreast  with  the  last,  ajid 
both  sjx  paces  frt)ra  the  flank.  The  adjutant  wiW  be 
near  the  -lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  sergeant  major 
near  the  major.     - 

79.  The  colonel  will  have  no  £xed  place  as  the  in- 
structor of  his  battfrtfon  ;«btrt  in*  coMbus  composed,  of 
many  battalions,  he  will  place  himself  hj^itually  on 
the  directing  flank  fifteen  or  twenty  paees  from  the 
guides,  and  abreast  with  the  centre  of  his  battalion. 

80.  When  the  colpnel  shall  wish  to  move  the 
column  forward  wiUhout  halting  it,  he  will  cautipn 
the  battalion  to  that  etfect,  and  command :  *     - 

1.  By  company  right    tche'el.      2.  MARCH  for  double 
quick — March.) 

81.  At  the  first  commjind,  the  captains  of  the  com- 
panies will  execute  what  is  prescribed  for  breaking 

"  into  C(duaiB  from  a  halt. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  they  will  remi^in  in 
front  oT  4;heir  companies  to  superintend  the  move- 
ment ;  the 'companies  will  wh'eel  to  .the  right  on  fixed 
pivots  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company  No. 
185 ;  the' left  guides  vvill  conform  to  what  is, prescribed 
above ;  when  they  shall  arrive  near  the  perpendicu- 
lar, the  colonel  will  command : 

3.  Forward,     4.  March.     5.  Guide  left. 

83.  At. the  t-hird  command,  each  covering  sergeant 
will'  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  the  man  on 


22  SCHOOL  OF  THE  RATTALKJN— i'AR'f  11. 

the  ligbt  of  the  front  rank  <;f  his  eoinpaiiy.  At  the 
fouilfh  eouiniaiKlj_  which  will  he  ffiTX^n  at  "tlie  iiistaiit 
the-Mheel  is  completed,  the  conipauies  will  cease  to 
wheel  and  march  straiylit  forward.-  At  the  fifth,  the 
men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The 
leading  guide  wiU,in!sich  ;u  the  dij-ection  indicated  to 
.him  by  the  li^i'tenant  colorffel.  The  guides  will  im- 
mediately •conform  tti^^'uiselves 'to  the  prmciples  of  the 
inarch  in  colUuiu,  school  of  the  company.  No.  2()0  and 
following. 

84.  If  the  Uattalion  be  marelijng  in  line  of  battle, 
th-e  colondl  w-ill  cause  it  to  wheel  tx>  tire  right  <»r  left, 
by  the  same  commands  and  same  means ;  but  he 
should  previously  caution  the  battalion  thalr  it'  is  to 
cciiitinue  the  march. 

85.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into 
column  by  compa'ny  to  the  left,  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means  ;  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  each  company  wHl  conduct  the  marching 
flank,  and  the  left;- guides  wiirplace  themselves  on  the 
left  of  their  respective  companies  at  the  command 

forward. 

86.'  When  a  battalion  has  to  prolong  itself  in.culumn 
towards  the  right  or  lett,  or  h«s  to  direct  its  march 
in  column  perpendicularly  or  diagonally  in  front>  or 
in  rear  of  either  flank.  The  colonel  will  cause  it  to 
break  by  company  to  the  right  or  left,  as  has  just 
been  prescribed  ;  but  when  the  line  breaks  to  the 
right,  iu  order  to  march  towards  the  k*ft,  or  the  re- 
verse, the  "colonel  will  command:  Break  to4hc  rig)it 
to  inarch  to  the  left,  or  Irreak  io  the  left  to  viarch  to  the 
right,  before  giving  the  command,  by  compavy,  right 
(oi^left)  icheel.  As  soon  as  the  battalion  is  broken, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  w:iH  place  a  marker  abreast  with 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIQN— PMIT  II.  23 

the  right  guide  of  the  leading  Company.  The  instant 
the  coluuin  is  put  in  motion,  this  eompatiy  '?V'ill  wheel 
to  the  left  (or*right)  mai'x.*h"  ten  pace's  to  the  front 
without  changing  the  gurile,  and. wlieel  again  to  the 
left  (-or  right).  The  second  Avheel  being  compjeted, 
the  captiiin  will  inimediately-comniand  guide  left  (5r 
right).  The  gilide  of.this  i^ompanywilT  m.nch  in  a 
dirgction  parallel  to  the  guides  of  the  column.  The- 
lieuten;int  colr)nel  uill  be  careful  t6  place  a  second 
marker  at  .the  point  where  the  first  company  is  to 
change  difeclion  the  sectnid  time. 

Articee  Second. 
To    break    to    the    rear,    by    the    right    or   left,    into 
column, -and    to    advance   or   retire  by' tht  right  or 
left,  of  j:ompames. 

87.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  the.bat- 
taliou  to  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  into  co.lumn 
by  company,  he  will  counnand : 

1.  By  the   right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into  oolumn. 

2.  Battalion  right— Face.     3.  March  (or  doublf. 

quick  —Mahch.) 

S3.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  befoi-e  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  cau- 
tion 4f  to  face  to  the  right;  the  covering  sergeants 
will  step  into  the  trout  rank. ' 


24  e^CIidbl,  OF  THE  BATTALi    N— PART  II. 

89.  At  .the  second  cIiuyTiand,  the  bailiilidii  will  face 
to  the  right ;  'fach  captuiii  will  haste^  to  the  right  of 
his  company,  and  break  two  files  to4he  rear  ;  tlif  first 
file. will  break  thie  whole  depth  of^he  two  ranks;  the 
second  file  less;  whi^h  being  executed,  the  captain 
will  placfe, himself  so  lh;(t  his  breast  may  touch  light- 
ly theieft  arm  of  thv  front  raiilt  man  of  the  last  file 
in  the  company^next  on  the  right  of  his  own.  The 
captain  of  the  ri^ght  company  will  place  himself  as  if 
there  were  a  ctmipaUy  on  his  right,  aijd  will  align 
himself  on  the  other  captamS.  The  c'overing  sergeant 
of  each  company  will  break  to  the  rear  with  the  right 
files,  and^  place  himself  before  the  front  rank  of  the 
first  file,  to  cohduct  him. 


90.  At, the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  each 
company  will  wheel  to  the  right ;  the  covering  ser- 
geant, placed  before  this -file,  will  conduct  it  perpen- 
diculaily  to  the  rear.  The  other  file*  will  fonre  suc- 
cessively to  wheel  oh  the  same  spot.  The  captains 
witr  stand  fast,  see  their  companies  file  past,  and  at 
the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have  wheeled,  each  cap- 
tain will  command : 

1.  Such  company.    2.  Halt.     3    Front.     4.  Left — 
Dress. 

91.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  t}ie  front, 
its  left  guide  will  place  himself  so  that  his  left  arm 
may  touch  lightly  the  breast  of  his  captain; 

92.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  comprtny  will  align 
itself  on  its  left  guide*,  the   captain  so  directing  it, 


SCHOOL  "F  THE  BATTALION— PARTJI.  25 

that  the  new  alignment  ijiay  be  perpendicular  to  that 
which  the  company  had  occupied  in  line  of  battle, 
and,  the  better  to  ju^ge  this,  he  will  step  back  two 
paces  from  the  fliii\k.    ^  -  . 

93.  The  company  being* fUigned,  the  captaJu^wiU 
command:  FiioNT,  and  take  his  place  before  its 
centre. 

94.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when 
the  cohtnel  shall  wish  to  break  into  column  by  com- 
pany, to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  he  WiW  command : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  yo  the  rear  into  column. 
2.  Battalion  by  the  right  Jlanlc-  3.  March  (or 
double  fjmck) — MARCH, 

95.  At  the  first  commantl,  each  captain  will  step 
briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company,  and 
caution  it  to  face  by  the  right  flank. 

96.  A.t  the  command  march,  the  battali<m  will  face 
to  tlie  right;, each  captain  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
right  of  his  company  and  cause  it  to  bi'eak  to^the 
right;  the  first  file  of  each  company  will  wheel  to 
the  rigtit,  and  the  covering  sergeant  placed  in  front 
of  this  file  will  conduct  it-perpendiciilarly  to  the  rear; 
the  (tther  files  will  wheel  successively  at  the.  same 
place  as  the  first.  T-he  captains  will  see  their  com 
panics  file  past  them  ;  when  the  last  files  have  wheel-' 
ed,  the  colonel  will  command: 

3.  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank — March. 
4.   Guide  left. 


26  SCIIQDL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II. 

97.  At  tlie  ct)inuuiii<l  march,  the  coniprtiiies  will 
face  to  the  left-,  and  .march  ju  column  mi  the  new  di- 
rection. The  captains  will  plac^  then. selves  in  front  of 
tlie  centres  of  their  .n  spectiye  comp.mies.  At  the 
fourth  commaiid,  the  guides  will  c'ouforni  to  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  march  in  .c»>lunin;  the  leading  one  will 
move  in  the  direction  indicated  -to  him  by  the  lieu- 
tenant Colonel.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  el- 
bows to  the  left. 

98.  To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  the  colonel 
will  .give  the  same  commands  as  in  the  c.ise  of  break- 
ing to  the  rear  by  the  right,  sub^itut'ingthe  indica- 
tion left  for  that  of  right. 

99.  The  movement  will -be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles.  Each  c;»ptain  will  hasten  to  the 
left  of  his'cqmpany,  cause  the  first  two  files  to  break 
to  the  rear,  and  then  place  his  breast  against  the  right 
file  of  the  com'pany  next- on  the  left  of.  his  own,  iiithe 
manner  prescribed  above. 

.  100.  As  Foyn  as  the  two  files,  break  to  the  rear,  the 
left  guide  of  each  company  will  place  hinjself  before 
the  front  rank  man  of  the  headmost  filt),  to  conduct 
hiiy. 

101..  The  instiint  the  companies  face  to  the  front, 
the  right  guide  of  each  will  )dace  himself  so  hiat-his 
right  aiin  may'lightly  touch  the  breast  of  his'captain. 

102.  The  battalion  may  be  broken  by  division  to 
•  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  in'like  manner;  in  this 
case,- the  indication  divisions  will  be  substituted,  in 
the  first  command,  for  that.of  coiiipamcs  ;  the  chiefs 
of  division  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  {H'e- 
scribed  for  the  cliiefs  of  company.  The  jtmior  cap- 
tain in  each  division    will  place  himself,  when  the  cli- 


SCHO  )L  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  U.       -27 

vision  faces  to  a' flank,  by -the  &ide  of  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the 'left  company,  who  steps  into  th«  front 
rank. 

103.  If  there  be  fin  (rdd  number  of  couipames^and 
the  battalion  breaks  jjyjdiyision  .t<i  the  rear,  whether 
by  the  j-ight  or  le'ft?  the  captain  of  t!  e,left  company 
will  conforin'to  what  is'prescribeil  No.  77,.  ■» 

104.  This  Manner  of  breaking  inio  columji  being  at 
once  the  most  promp't  and  'rejjular,  wiH  be.  puel'erfed 
oiT  actual  service,  unless  there  be  some*  particular 
reason  for  breaking  to  the  front. 

105.  If  *lie  b«ttalion  be  in  line  and  at  a  balt» 
and  the  colonel  sht)uld  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by 
the  right  of  companies,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By   the  right  of  companies  to  the  front  {or  rear.) 

2.  Battalion,  right— FACE.  3.  March  (or  double 

ywicA:— March.)     4.  (7uidc  right,    (hft^  or  (cen- 
tre.) 

106.  At  thgi  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
rapidly  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  oflTis  com- 
pany, and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right;  the  cover- 
ing sei-geaiits  will  replace  the  captain's  in  the  front 
rank.  . 

107.  At  the  second  command,  Ihe  battalion  will 
flice«to  the  right,  and  each  captain  n^oving  quickly 
to  the  rigl'.t  of  his  company  will  cause  files  to  break 
to  the  front,  according  to  the  principles  indicated 
No.  89. 

108.  At  the  command  march,  each  cnptaMi  jdacing 
hin)self  on  the  left  of  his.leading  guide  will  conduct 
his  company  perpendicularly  to  the  original  line.     At 


28  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  U. 

the  fourt-h  command,  ttie  gaide  of  ea'ch  company  will 
dress  t^  the  right,  left  or  centre,  accorfKng  to  the  in- 
dication given,  taking  care  to  preserve  accurately  his 
distance. 

109.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  to  the 
front,  or  i"^ar,  by  the  left  o*f  feam-panies,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  "tlfe  same  mf?ans  and  the 
same  comm'andf  substituting  left  fov  r^lit. 

•110.  If'the  battflli(m  be  in  march,  and  the- colonel 
should  vvish  to  advanc*^  or  retire  by  the  right  of  com- 
panies, he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  ri^ht  of  companies  to^lie  front  (ox  rear.) 
2.  Battalion,  "ly  the  right  flank. , '  3.  March  (or 
double  quick — MARCH.)  4.  Guide  right,  {left)  or 
{centre.) 

ill.  Which  will  be  executed-  according  to  the 
principles  .and  means  prescribed  Nos.  95  and  fdllow- 
ing,  and  106  and  following.  At  -the  first  command, 
the  .color  and  general  guides  will  take  their  places  as* 
in  column,  ,  • 

112.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  re- 
tire by  the  left  of  companies,  the'  movement  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  means  and  the  ^ame  com- 
mands,-substitutiqg /c//5  for  rio^/tf. 

■113.'  If  the  battalion  be  advancing  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to 
form  line  to  the  front,  he  will  commajid : 

1.  By   companies  into   line.      2     March  (or  double 
quick— ^Iarcu.)     3.  Guide  centre. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II.  29 

114.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  each-  cempany  will  be  formed  into  line, 
as  prescribed  in  thg  school  of  the  .company,  No.  15  f.  • 

115.  At  the  third  command,  t^e  color  And  genej-al 
guides  will  move  rapidly  to  theic  pliwcr^  in  line, 
as  will  be  hereinafter  prescribed  No.  405. 


116.  If  the  bijttalioa  be  retiring  "by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies,  ai\d  the  colouel  should  wish  to 
form  line  facing. the  enemy,  he  will  first  cause  the 
companies  tcf  face  about  while*marching,  and  imme- 
diately form. in  lineLby  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed N«s.  113  and  foMoWing. 


Article  Third. 
To  ploy  the'battation  into  close  column. 


•117.  Thi^  inovement  may  be  executed  by  company 
or  by  division,  on  the  right  or  left  subdivision,  or  on 
any  other  suljdivision,  right  (tr  left  in  front.  • 

]  1-8.  The  examples  in  th'is  school  will  suppose  the 
presence  of  four  divisions,  with  directions  for  an 
odd  company ;  but  what  wilt»be  prescribed  for  four, 
will'serve  equally  for  two,  three, -or  five  divisions. 

119.  To  ploy  the  battalign  info  close  column  by 
division  in  rear  of  the  first,  the  colouel  will  command: 


30  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  JL 

].   Close    column,   by  dicision.      9,.' On  ihc  Jir^t  divl- 
^^sion,    right    in  fvimt.     ?>.  Battalion,  right— ^F act. 
'  4'  MarCII  (\\r  doyMc  quick— HsIarcu .) 


J"20.  At  the  second  'comniand,  all  the  chiefs  i-i" 
division  will  p^ace'thcniselves  befpre  the  centres,  of 
ttieir  divis'ftins  ;  the  chief  of  the  first  will  caution  it 
to  stand  fast ;  the  ciiiefs  of  the.three^others  will  re- 
mind them  that  thejj.mll.-hav€i  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
the  covering  seygean*  of  the  right  compiuiy  of  eaV'h 
division  will  replace  his  captain ■iu' the  front  nnil^ 
"soon  as  the  latter  stQps  out.    ' 

12V.  At  the  third  command,  the  last  three  divi- 
sions will  face  to  the  riglit;  the  chief  of  each  division 
will  hasten  to  its  eight,  and  effuse  files  to  be  broken 
to  the  rear,  as  indicated  No.  89;  the  right  guide 'will 
break  at  the  sumo  time,  and  pla*ce  himself  before  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  first  Me,  to-  cpncluct  him,  and 
each  chief  of  divisio'i*will  place  himself  by  the  side 
of  this  guide.  '  • 

• 

122.  The- moment  these  divisions  face  to  the 
right  ilm  Junior  captain  in  each  will  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company, 
who  will  place  himself  in  .the  front  rank.  This  rule 
is  general  for  all  the  ploy  ments  by  divi&ifin. 

123,  At  the  command- m^?rc/i,  ihe -chief,  of  the  first 
division  will  add :  guuh  left ;  at  this,  its  left  guide 
will  place  himself  on  its  left,  as  soon  as  the  move- 
ment of  the  second'-divisi^jn-'may  iiermit,'and  the. file 
closers  will  advance  t>ne  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 


30 

].  Cloi 

,  ,  sion, 

■4.  W 


120. 
divimn 
their  d 
to  staiK 
niindth' 
the  .co'j 
divisior 
soon  as 

12]'. 
sions  w 
will  hat 
to  the  r" 
break  a. 
front  r; 
each  ch 
of  this 

122. 

right  j;h 
the  left 
who  wi 
is  gcncr 

123.  . 

divihiini 
will  pl{ 
me  lit  0 
closers 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IL     31 

124.  All  the  other  divisions,  each  conckicted  by  its 
chief,  will  stejj  off  togetheu,  to  take  their  pl.icee  in 
the  p(tliimn;  the  seeonii  will  gain,  in-  wiieeliiig' by 
file  to  the-i-ear,  the  space  of  sijc  paces,  W'hich  ought 
to  separate  its?  guide  from  the  guide  of  the  first  di- 
vision, and'so  direct  its  inarch  as  to  ^utej-  the  culunm 
on  a  line  [parallel  t<>  this  division  ;  the  thi^d  ^i^'id  fcnirth 
divisions  will  direct  themselves  diagonnlly  towards, 
btit  a  little  in  rear  of,  the  points  at  which  they  ought, 
respectively,  to  enter  the  column}  at  six  paces  from 
the  teffc  rtaidvof  the  column,  the  head  of  each  of  these 
divisions  will  incline  ar  little  to  the  left,  in  ordiM*  to 
enter  the  column  as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
second,  taking  care  also  to  leave  the  distance  of  six 
paces  between  its  gjide  and  the*  guide  of  the  pre- 
ceding division.  At  the  .moment  .the  divisions  put 
themselvt^s  in  niarch  to  enter  the  column,  the  file 
closers  of  each  will  incline  to  the  left,  so  as  to  ijrjng 
themselves  to  the  ^istancaof  a  pace  from  the  rear 
rank.  '♦  •    -     . 


125.  Each  chief  of  these  thi'ce  •diviiiions  will  con- 
duct his  <JiYis.i(h^ti-llhe  shall  be  up  with  the  guide  tp 
the  directing  one ;  the  chief'will  then  himself  haJt, 
see  his  division  ^le  past,  and  halt  it -the  iustant  the 
last  file  shall  have  passed,  commanding*:  i..Suc/i  di- 
vision; 2.  Halt;  3.  Front;  4.  Left— Dress. 


126.  At  ttiB second  command,  the  division  will  halt; 
the  left  g.ujde  will  place  hfmself  promptly  on  the  di- 
rection, six  paces-from  the  guide  which  precedes  him, 
in  order.that,  the  column  being  formed,' the. divisions 
may  bQ  saparated- the  distiwee  of  four  paces. 


S8  SCHOOL. OF  THE  BATTALT   N— PART  II. 

127.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  fuce 
to  tbe  front;  at  the-  louutf,  it  will  be  aliji^ned  by  its 
chief,  who  wiH  place  himself^  two  puces  ontside  of  his 
guide,  and  direct  .the^  alignment  so  that  his  division 
utny  be  panillel  to  that  which  precedes— which  being 
done,  he  will  cl)mmand,  ^1<-R(>N'1',  and  place  himself 
before  the  cylitre  of  his  division. 

128.  If  any  division,  after  the  command  froiij,,  be 
not  at  its  proper  distance* and  ti^s  can  only  happen 
through  the  negligence  of  jts  chief,  such  divUioil  will 
remain  in  its  place,  in  order  that  the  fault  may  not  be 
propagated. 

129.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  execution  of 
the  movemeut,  and  calise  the  prescribed  principles  to 
be  observed. 

130.  The  lieutenant  cofonel,  pli^jjing  himself  in  suc- 
cession in  rear  of  the  left  guides,  will  assure  them  on 
the  direction  as  they  arfive,  and  then  move  to  his 
place  outside  of  the  left  flank. of  tBe  ctJunin  six  ^iaces 
from,  and  ab'reast  ^vith,  the  first  division.  I"  as- 
suriHg  th^'  guifles  on  the  directibti,  he  wilt  \q  a  mere 
observer,  nnless»one  or  more  should  failto  cover  ex- 
actly the  guide  or  guides  already- ei^ablished.  This 
rule  is  general.  •. 

131.  The  nraj or  will- follow  the  movemeTit  abreast 
with  the  left  of  the  fourth  division,  and  tifterwards 
take  his  position  outside  of  the  left  flank-  of  the  col- 
umn, six  paces  from,  andabreast  w'ith,  this^  division. 

132.  To  ploy  the  battalion  infront.  of  £lie  first  divi- 
sion, the.  c.olonel  wil-1  give  the  ^me  coinn)and,  sub- 
stituting the  indication  left  {i>v  that  of  r/^/^/i/ in  front. 


tiCllUOL  OF  THE  BAITALION— i'AliT  li  33 

133.  At  the  .second  and  tLy-d  compands,  the  chiefs 
of  division  and  the  junior  captanis  ^^ill  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  120,  ] 2 J,  122;  but 
the  chiefs  of  the  last  three  divisiorfs,  instead  of  caus- 
ing the  first  two  files  to'break  t64;he  rear,  will  cause 
them  to  bi-eak  to  the  front, 

134.  At  the  fouRh  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  idd:  "6'M^Ver^o^^^« 

135.  The  three  other  divisions  will  step  off  together 
to  take  their  places  in  the-c<Jumn  in  front  ftf  the  di- 
recting division  ;  eaclr  wifl  direct  itself  as.jwescribed, 
Net.  124,  and  will  enter  in  guch  manner  that,  whefi' 
halted,  its  guide -tfiaj^  find  himself-six  paces  from  .the 
guide  of,  the  division  next  previously  esta]>lished'  in 
the  colunyi. 

136.  Each  chief  of  thetse  divisions  will  conduct  hiB^ 
divisioy,  tilt  his  night  guide  shtill  be  nearly  up  with 
the  guide  of  the  fjireofting  one  ;  he  mAW  th^u-halt-his 
division,  an'd  cause  it  to  face  to  the  frojit;  at  the  in- 
stant it  halts,  its. right  guide  will  face  to  the  rear, 
place  hitnself  six  paces  n-om  the  preceding  guide, 
and  cover  him  exactly— ^which  bbing  done,  the  chief 
will  align  his  ditisjonbythe  rigWf. 

137.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  place'd  in  front  of  the 
right  gui^e  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the  guides 
on  tlie  direction  asj  they  successivoly  arrive,  and  then 
move  outside  (f  the  right  itrmk  of  the  column,  to  a 
point  six  paces-from,  .-wid  abreast  with,  the  fourth  di- 
vision, now  in  fronli.  . 

138.  The  inbjor  will  conform  himself  to  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  13i,  and  then  move  outside  of.  the 
right  flank  of  tjie  column,  six  paces  from,  and  abreastr 
with;  the  first  division,  Jiow  in  rear. 

3 


34     SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  11. 

•J 30.  The  movQmeiit  lacing  ended,  tlje  colonel  will 
command : 


Guides,  ahon{ — Face. 

140.  At  this,  the  guic^s,  who  are*f\i^ed  to  the  rear, 
will  fiice  to  the  front. 

141.  To  ploy  the  battalion  inTear,  Or  in  front  of  the 
fourth  division,  the  colonel  will  comnumd  : 

1.  Close,  cohfvin  hy  division.  2.  On  the  fourth  divi- 
sion, If^i  (orriffht)  izt  front.  3.  Battaliun,  lift — 
Face.    4   Mkrcu  (iix.douifte  quick — March.) 

142.  Tkese  movements  will  be  executed  a-ccording 
to  the  pryiciples  of  tliose  which  precede,  but  by  in- 
verse means  ;  the  fourth  division  on  \vhich  the  bat- 
talion ploys  wili.  stand  fast;  the  in^nt  the  uuwement 
eoihmeivces,  its  "chiet"  vyill  ^orA^"fta«d,  guide  right  [or 
left,} 

:  143.  The  foregoing  examples  "embrace  all  the  prin- 
ciples: thus,  wh^n'the  colpnel  shuTLwish  to  ploy  the 
battalion  on  an  intei»©a"  division,.  h*e  will  cbmmand: 

>.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  suQh* division ^ 
figM  Cor  left)  %  front.  3  Batialioh  imcctrds — 
Face.    4.  yi.\KQiii^v  double  quicli>—MM\c\\.) 

J 44.  The  instant  th'e  movement  cfl'himenc.es,  .the 
chief  of  the  directing  division  vyill  commaiid,  guide 
left  (or  right,) 

145.  The  divisions  which,  jn  the  order   in.  battle, 


SCH€OL  OF  THEIUTTALrdN— PAR'IMI.  35 

am  ^*  tke  riglkt  of,M«?  (lirec-tii)g'  divis5ii>n,,will  face  to 
the  left ;.  tltt'^e  vvbiSh  aVo  to  the  leffr;  vvilfftvc^  to.ttie 
right.  ,'*  .  .  • 

14G.  If  the  fi^ht  is  To  In?  iti'^front^rtlie' righlrttiv!- 
siotiR  will  ploy  iji  front  of  thcdfc^cting  division,  and 
the  left  in  its  rear*;  the  i-tverse,  if  ,thei  left  is  to"  be  in 
front.  And  in  all  tUe  fowg/Tiag  snp|>i»skions,  thcdi- 
vision  hi-  diiiijions  «onti^nuus  to  iEe  dfi'Qctiiigj.cnie,  in 
wheelinir  by  file  to  the^front  or  renr,  .vvilf.<t^iin-.the 
space  of  six  paces,  whiT>h  okigSt  '  to  separat(5  -their 
gnides  from  the^guidl?  «ff  tlie'directfing  divisitvn. 

147.  In'allit'he  pl/iylVients  on  an.  ^interior  divisic^n, 
the  licirtemi-u*  cgloneJ  wi-W.as'sure  thVpositiorls  of -the 
gnides  in  front,  Tindth(5  major  those  in  the  rearof  thjB' 
directing  div^ion.  .  ,    • 

148.  If  th-ei)attalion.be  in  n3{|i'{?ti,instea(r  of  at  a 
halt,  the  movement  will  Ijc.  executed  by  coiut)iflljig 
the  two*gaits_of  quick  .'yuldoubh^  }jl.iick  time,  iind  al- 
ways iti  rear  of  ofie  of  the  1\aul^  ditisirlhs. 

.14J^  The  battalion  being  in  march^to  pley  it  in  rear 
of  the  first  division,  the  ccjonel  will  command: 

1.  Closc^  column  hy  division'.''  2.  'On  the 'first  dicislon. 

3.   Uattalioh-^y-,the  right  flank.     4.  Double  quick 

— March. 

150.  A^the  second' command,  each  chief  of  division 
wilt  move  rapidly  before  the  centre'  of  his  diyieion 
and  caution  it  to  face  to  the^ri^t. 

15L  The  chief  of  the  first  division-will;  caution  it 
to  coiitinue»to  march  to  the  front,  Hnd  he  will  com- 
mand :    Qifick  march. 


3fi  S<fHUUL  OF'THK  BAl^AWON— PART  If.' 

152.  At  thp  commtind  march,  tiie^cliief  of  *he  >fij-st 
dlpUioii  Twill"toir!i»aii(l :  Giddc  left.'  At  ttrts,.the  left 
g.uia(^  will  inoye  to.lhe  left  ilaiik  of  the  division  and 
d  hx'c  ti  him  self  ^n  the  ^)aint  indicated.  '* 

156T  The  thive  *»pier.divii^ons  will  face  to  the  right 
aiid  move'  oif  iai  douWe*  qnick  T-iuic,  bKeakiug  to  the 
right  to  take  Iftenr  pkcos  in  column;  ea»h  chief  of 
division  will  move  nujidly  to  |he  right,  ^f  his  division 
in  order  to  conduct  i-t.  The  ftles  will.be  careful  to 
preserve  their  distitnces/aiid  tp^tfiawl^with  a  uniform 
aiKi-  decided  step.  The  colof-lliiiarcr  innd  general 
-gUicles  wilH'etaEe  ^Jieir  plaifesiB.thejran.ks. 

151.  The  second.' divisitm- will  ijnmt?«Iiately  enter 
tte^olumn,  marching  parallel'  to  the  first  division  ; 
its. chief  will  allow  it"  to-file  past  him",  aiid  wjien  tfie 
laet  file  is  abregiiSt'-of  bini,  <yill  comma lul:  •  1;  Second 
division,  hy  the  left  flaiik — MauCH  2.  Gui(k  left, 
and  j)lace  httfisetf  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his4<iivi- 
gign. 

155.  At  the  command  march,  tl\p  division  will  face 
to  the  left;  nt  the 'second  command,  the  lelt  guide 
will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  left  ^uide  of  the  first 
division;  the  men' will  takis"  the  tjpucb -of  elbows  to 
the  left.  When  the  second  divisron^htis  closed' to  its 
proper  distance,  its  chijf  will  command  :  Qiiioh  time 
— March.  This  division  will  then  change  its  step  to 
quick  time. 

156."  The  chiefs  of  .the  third' and  fotirth.  divisions 
will  execute  their  movements  according  to  tihe  same 
principles,  taking  cai*e-  ti>  gain  iis  much  ground  as 
possible  towards  the- head  of  the  column.    . 

157.  If  the  battalit)n  had  been-previously  marching 
in  line  at  double  quick  time,  when  the  fourth  <livision 


SCHOCA  OF  THE  BATTALF'N— PART  III.  37 

shall  have  eafiued  its  distuuce,  the-  celouel  -will  ^era- 
mand :  Damlc  quiQk — March. 

158.  .In  this  movemeiit^the  lieirtena-nt  cpTonel  XK'TIl 
move  rapidly  to  the  side  /tf  the  leading  guide,  give 
him  a  point  of  dire^tFon,  and  thien  follow  the  move- 
ments of  the  first  division.  'The  major  will  foHovV 
the  movement  ubteiist  with  the  Iftft  of  the  fourtii'tli.* 
virion. 

Remarks  on  ploying  the  battalion  into  column. 

-    .    •     •      .  /" 

159.  The  bffttsiiiou  may  be  ployejT  4ftto  coliumn  at 
full,  or  half  distan(?e,  on  the  same  principles,  iuid  by 
the  same  -commandg,  sabstjtutiug  tor  the  first  com- 
mand:  Column  at  full  {oy  ftttlf)  distancc'ly  (livisJ,on 

*•  r  ,  •!  * 

160.  In  thtibployments  and  ibovements  'm  column, 
when  the  subdivisions  execute  ttie  mdv^mervts  suc- 
cessively, such  as— to  take  or  close  distances*;  to 
change  directioi^^  by  tke  flank  of  subdivisions,  e^ch. 
chief  of  s\ibdis'ision  ."s^ill  Cause  his  men  to  support 
arms  after  having  aligned  it  ajid  commanded  Front. 

.PARTraiRD. 

Article  First, 

To  march  in  column  at  full  distance.- 

161.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  put  the  col- 
umn iji  marclit  he  will  indicate  to  tfie  Jeading  guide 
two  distinct  objects  in  front,  on»the  line  which  the 
guide  ought  to  follow.     This  guide  will  immediately 


38  SCIIO(iL  -F  THE  BATTALiON— ^RT  HI. 

pu*  his  shoulders- in  a  square  with-tbat*liiic,  take  the 
more  dista!  t  X)l)ject  as  the  pidnt  ot  *dire(5tit)n,  and  the 
rujarer- «ue  as  the  jtitermoduile  point. 
•       • 

16"2.  If  only  a  single  prinniucnj;  tftyect  prcspnt  itself 
in  the  direction  tlit)  gukle  l^as  to  follow,  he  will  face 
»to«it'as  hefcn-e,  and  immediately  endeavor  to  catch  on 
the**grouiid  some  intermediate  'pointy  by  which  to 
give  steadiness' to  his  maiAch  on  the  point\>f  dirl^ction. 

163.  TEerc  being  no  prominent  object  to  serve  as 
the  point  of  ^ir^ctlon,*  tht-  dT)l<fnel  will  dispatch  the 
lieutenant  c^ionek  or  adjutant  to^placc  himself  fi)rty 
paces  in  advance,  facing  the  column,  and  by  a  sign  of 
the  sword  establish  him  ^n  ttie  direction  he  may  wdSh 
to  gh'C  to  the  l^idingguide  ;  thilit  ofiicer  being  thus 
placed,  this  guide  \^^l,tilke  him  as  tLe»poinli  of  direc- 
ticm,  conii)rming  himself  t(> what  is  prescribed  in  the 
schooL<ifthe  company  No.  87. 

•164.  Th^se  dispositJMi\s  being  nwde*  the  colonel 
will  command :  ■..'•. 

1.   Column  foricard.     2.  Guide   left    (or   right).      3. 
March  (or  double  quick — March,  j 

165.  At  tlie  command  'marcJi,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  subdivision,  the  column  .will  put  itself  in 
march,  conforming  to  what  ispre^cr^bed  in  the  sciiool 
<;f  the  company  No:  200  and  following. 

166.  Xhe  leading  guide  may  always  .maintain  him- 
self correctly  on  the  diVection  by  keeping  steadily  in 
view  the  two  points  indicated  to  him,  or  chosen  by 


J£^ 


H^i 


Fi# 


«H^ 


'^' 


_ F 

M 

J- 

■ 

.4 

p 

4 

_       _H 

1                !-■ 

1               1-^ 

1              ^ 

%- 

P 

Fie? 


i- 


cr— — — p 


pje.5 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IIL  39 

liimsolf;  if  these  points  have  a  certain  elevatioji,  he 
may  btMis-^ui-^'d  he  is  on  tlie.true  diret;tiou,  when  the 
nearer  masks  the  more  distant  point 

167.  The  following. guided  will  preservje  wnth-ex- 
actness  both   step  and  distiiyce ;  each  will  marcli  rn  . 
the  trace  of   the  guide    who    inuiiediately  precedes 
him,  without  ocoupying  himself  with  the  general  di- 
rection. 

168.  Tiie  lieutenant  colonel'  will  hold  himself,  ha- 
bitually, abreast  with  the  leading'guide,  to  see  that 
he  does  not  dt^viate  from  the  direction,  and'will  ob- 
serve, also,  that  the  next  guide  marcjies  exactly  in 
the  trace  of  the -first. 

169.  The  major  will  geoiirally  be  abreast  with  the 
last  subdivision  ;  he'wiii  se^  that  each.giiide  marchrcs 
exactly  in  the  trace  i*f  the  one  imiuediately  preccd 
iug  ;  if  eilhei;  deviate  from  the  directionj.ihe  majoi- 
will  pronjptly  rectify  the  error,  and  prevent  its  being 
propagated;  but  he  need  yot  interfere,  in  this  way, 
unless  the  deviation  has  become  sensible,  or  iliaterial. 

170.  The  column  being  rn  ^uarch,  the  colonel  will* 
frequently  cause  the  abovi  tD  be  executed  while 
marching;  to  this  elfect,  he  will  commantl : 

1.    Battalion,    right    about.      2'   March.     3.    Guide 

right. 

171.  At  the  r<econd  command,  the  companies  will 
face  to  the  riglit  about,  and  the  column  will  then 
march  lorvvard  in  an  opposite  <iii;ection;  the  chiefs  of 
subdivision  will  remain  behind  the  front  rank,  the  file 


40  SCnOOI>  OF  THE   BATTALION— PAR g;  III. 

-closer's  in  front  of  the  rear  rank,  -.{nCi  the  mtides  will 
place  themselves  in  the  s;inie  rank.  Tj^e  lit*tttenant 
Qolouel  will  remain  abreast  of  the  first  division,  now^ 
in  rear;  the  major  will  j,'ive  a  point  of  direction  to 
tha'4eading.guide,  and  ma'reh  abreast  of  him. 

172.  The  colonel'  will  hold  himself  habitually  on 
the  directing  flank;  he  will  look  to  the  step  and  to 
the  distances,  and  see  that  all  the  principles  prescrib- 
ed'for  the  march  in  column,  school  of  the  company, 
are  observed. 

-  173.  These  -means,  wljich  the  practice  in  that 
school  ought  to  have  rendered  familiar,  will  give  suf- 
ficient exactness  to  the  direction  of  the  column,  and 
also  enable  it  to  form/orec'«r^  ov  faced  the  rear,  on  the 
right,  or  on  thcleft,  into  Ime  of  battle,  and  to  close  in 
mass. 

174.  Biit  w^hen'a  cohimn,  arriving  in  front,  or  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  or,  rathei",  on  one  of  the 
ex-tremities  of  that  line,  lias  to  prtdong  its(.df  on  it,  in 
oi'der  to_formJo  the  left  or  to  the  rigJit  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, then,  as  it  is  essential,  to  prevent  the  column 
from  cutting  the  line,  or  sensibly  deviating  from  it, 
other  meanS.  as  follovvs,  will  be  employed. 

The  column  arrivincr  hi  front  of  the  line  of  battle,  to 
prolong  it  on  this  line. 

175.  If  the  cohimn  right  in  front  aiwi^'o  in  front  of 
the  line  of  battle,  as  it  should  cross  it' and  find  itself 
four  paces  beyond  it  after  having  cliang<'d  dii-ection, 
the  colonel  will  cause  to  be  placed,  in  advance,  a 
marker  on  the  line  Jo^ndicate  the  point  at  wjiich  the 


SCHOOL  Qi*  THE  BATTALION— PART  Hi.        41 

column  oughtto  cross  it,  and  another  marker  to  indi- 
cate the  point  where^the  first  subdivision  should  com- 
mence to  wheel ;  •  he'will  be  so  placed  that  when  the 
wh  'el  is  executed,  tlir?  left  guide  will  find-himself  four 
puces  vVitiiin  the  liue  of  .battle.  The  chief  of  the. 
leading  subdivision,  when  tRe  head  of  the  column 
shall  have  arrived  ne.u'  the. lin^, Will  take  the'girtde 
to  the  right,  and  this  guide -will  imineJi;H;ely  direct 
himself  on  the  second  marfiLer.  On  arijting  abreast 
of  him,  this  subdivisidn  will  be  wheeled  to  the  lelt, 
and  when  the  wheel  is  completed,  the  guide  will  be 
changed  again  to  the  left;  tliis  guide  will  then  march 
parallel  to  the  line  of  battle  by  the  means  to  be  here- 
inafter indicated. 


176.  The  instant  the  fii;st  subdivision  v^dieels,  the 
right  general  guide,  w'ho,  by  a  caution  from  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel, -Avill  before  have  placed  himself  on  tRe 
line  of  battle  at  the  p(»int  where  the  column  crosses 
it,  :ni(l  who  will  have  facPd  to  the 'two  points  of  di- 
rection in  his  front,  indicated  by  the  C(donel,  will 
march  forward"  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  those 
points. 

177.^  The  colnr-bearer  will  place  himself  in  like 
manne'r  on  the  line  of  battle-f  and,  at  £he  instant  the 
color  subdivision  wheels,  he  will  prolong  his  march 
on  that  line,  abreast  with  this  subdivision,  taking  care 
to  carry  the  color-lance  before  the  centre  of  his  per- 
son, and  to  maintain  himself  exactly  in  the  direction 
of  the  gene'ral  guide  who  precedes  him,  and  the  point 
of  direction  in  front  which  will  have  been  indicated 
to  him. 

17^.,Fhially,  tFie  left  general  guide  will  pliice  him- 
self in  the   same  maimer  on  the  line  of  battle;  and, 


42  SCHOOL  OF  THE  P,ATTALT(5N^^PART  III. 

at  the  instant  the  last  subdiTisicm  of  the  battalion 
^viie<'^s,  lie  will"  jiiarch  correctly  in  the  direction  of 
the  color-bearer,  and  the  other  general  guide. 

■  ]7?).  The  guide  of  "tliQ.fii'Bt  subdivision  \Vill  inarch 
steadily  abre.tt-i.  witii  the  ri"ht  *geniM-al  guide,  and 
about  foilr^  pjices  to  his^wghf ;  cac^h  of  the  guides  of 
thefoll<»-\vi*ig*subdivisions  will  iliaVch  in  the  trace  of 
the  guide -A^o  inimedia'tely  pa*ecedes  him,  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  167. 

180.  The  colonef,  placed  outside  oC  the  general 
•guicTes,  will  see  tbat  the  coluuiu  marches  nearly  par- 
allel to,  aud  tibout  four  paces  witkin  tliese  guides. 

181.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  major  will  look  to 
the  direction  of  fbe  general  gufdes,.atid  to  this  end, 
place  themselves  sometiaiies  in  rear  of  the  color-bear- 
er, or  the  left  general  gufde. 

482.  If  the  column  be  composed  ot  several  battal- 
ions, the  general  guides  of  each  \\ill  successively 
plaCe  themselves. on  the  line  of  battle  to  ])r(»lt»iig  their 
march  on  this  lin<;',  u^  ^he  leading  subdivision,  thiit  of 
the  color,  and.  the  one  in  the  rear  of  their  bnttalion, 
stall  wheel  into  the  ne\f*  direction;  these  guides  will 
corrform  tiiemselvcs  respectively,  as  will  algothe  colo- 
nel, lieutenant  colonel,  and  ni;ij<»r,  to  what  is  pve- 
sci'ibed  abitve  for  thosv".  of  the  leading  battalion. 

183.  In  the  case  of  several  Ijjittajions,  the"  lieuten- 
ant cohinel  of  each  will  maintain  steadily  the  guide 
of  his  leadi)ig  subdi\usion  about  four  paces  within  the 
line  of  geTieral  guides,  even  should  the  last  subdivi- 
sions of  the  battalion  immediately  preceding  deviate 
from  the' parallelism,  in  order  that  the  false  direction 


SCHOOL  OF  THjG;  battalion— part  IIL  43 

of  one  battfJiou  may  not  iiiflueKce  that  of  the  battal- 
ions which  follow.  •    •        • 


The  column  arriving  behind  the  line  of  battle,  to  pro- 
long it  on  this  line. 

184.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  arrive  bejiind 
the  line  of  hitttlo,  as  it  ought  to  find  itself  foui»paces 
within  this  line?  aftev  l^avlng^changed  direction,  the 
col(»nel  will  cawse  a  markei*  to  be  pla(;ed  at  the  point 
where,  according  to  that  condition,  t'le  first  subdivi- 
sion ought  to  conmience  ^yh6eling.  Another  marker 
will  be  estn-blisli^d  on'  the  line  ot^* battle,  ^o  indicate 
the  point  at  which  the  ^^neral  guides  ougiit.  in  siye- 
cession  to  begin  to  pndong  theiiisel\*es  on  .tlutf  line.; 
he  will  be  so  placed -thatuCSc*^  subdivi^ijui,  having 
finished  its  wh^el,  may  find  itself  nearly  in  a  liue 
with  this  marker.  •         .  * 

185.  At  the  instalit  the  first  subdivision,  gfter  hav- 
ing wheeled  t<»  'the  right,-  begins  to  grolong  itself, 
parnllelly  to* the  line  of  brittle,  the  leading  general 
guide,  phiq^d  in  ad^^ance  on  that  line,  will  direct  him- 
self on  the  two  points  tnken  in  "his  front;  the  colyr- 
bearej-and  the  "otl^' general  guide  will  successively 
place  themselves  on  tl?e  same ^line  the  instant  that 
their  rcf^lJeetivc  subdivision* shal|  have  finished  their 
wheel.  '  .    ' 

186.  If  the  coluTOn  be  .composed  of  several  biit- 
talions,  tlie  genei;;il  guides.of  the  follmviu'/  battalions 
win  successively  execute  what  has  been  just  pre- 
scribed for  {hose  of  the  leading  battalion,  and  the 
whole  will  conform  themselves,  as  well  as  the  guides 
of  subdivisions,  and  the  field  officers  of  the  several 


44  SCHOOL  OF  TEIE  BATTALION— PART  TIL 

battalions,  to  what  is  indicated,  above,  foi-  a  column 
arriving,  in  front  of  a  line  of  battle.* 


.  187.  In  a  column,  left  in  front^  arriving  in  front  or 
in  rear  of  the  line  of  battle,. these  movements  will  be 
executed  on  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

The  column  arriving  o^  the  rjght  or  fiie  left  of  the  line 
of  battle,  to  prolong  it  on-  this  line. 

■  188,  If  the:oolmpin,  iustfead*  of  .jrrriviBg  in  front  or 
in  rear  orthe  line  of  battler,  fi  rrive  on  its  'right  or  left, 
aftd  ff  it  liave  t«  prolong  itself  on  Ihat  line,  in  order 
afterwards  to  form  to 'the  left  or  right  into  line  of 
battle,  the  colonel  will  Bring  the  color  and  general 
giiides'  on  th'e  fla^ik  of  the  colunni  by  the  ct)mmaud 
color  and- general  guides  on  the  Una;,  and  these  guides 
will  proking  themselves  on  the  •line  of  battle,  con- 
forming to  wtat  is  prescribed  above: 

■Manner  of  prolonging  a  line -of  battle  by^narkers. 

189.  When  a  column  prolongs  ftself  on  the  line  of 
battle,  it  being  all-importyint  that  the  general  guides 
march  correctly-on  that  line,  it  becomes  necessary 
that  colonels,  lieutenant  colonels,  and  niajors,  whose 
duty  it  is  to  maintain  the.  true  direction,  should  be 
able  to  see,  as  f^ir  as  practicable,  the  two  objects,  on 
which  the  march  of  the  general  guides  ought  to»be 
directed;  consequently,  when  no  pronnnenf  objects 
present  themselves  in  the  desired  direction,  the  chief 
of  the  column  will  supply  the  want  of  them  in  ad- 


SCHOOfa.OF  TiJE  BATTALION— PART.  III.  4ij 

vance  by  aidAie-camp,  or  othfr  mounted  officers,  and 
in  such  number 'asiiiay  be  necessaiy.        * 

190.  Three  such  officers  may  prolong  a  line  as  far 
as  may  be  desired  in.  the  following  nijgijer  :  they 
will  place  themselves  rn  *advance,on  the-line  of-b'at- 
tle,  the  first  at  the  point  where  the  head  of  the 
column  ought  to  enter  ;  the  secynd,  three  or  fou^-  hun- 
dred paces  behind  tlieiirst^^and  tlTe'thiiiJ,  arlffce  dis- 
tance behind  the  second.  The  first  of  the'se  officers 
will  remain  in  position*till  the  leacliug  gtuj^fal-  guide 
shall  have  enleted  on  the  linfet)f  battle,- and  then,  at 
a  gallop,  place  himself  jat  a  ^nvenient^  distance  be- 
hind the  third.  Tl?e  second  will  do  tlR>-  like  in  re- 
spe'ct  to  the  first, -when  the  iTead  of  tlte^Qolumn.stali 
be  near  him,*nd  eo  oif  in  c^tntmualion.  TK-ese  ufticej^s, 
without  dism('UiUi/ig,  will  face  to  the  column,  and 
cover  each  otl^er  accuriitely.  in  file.  It  will  be  on 
thein  that  th^  general^ljides\yill  steadily 'direct  their 
march,  and  it  will  be  so  much  the  more  easy  for  the 
latter  to  maintain  themselves  on  the  direction,  as 
they  will  alv^ays  be  able  to  syd  ^e-  mounted"  officers 
over  ttj%  heads  of  tBe  prepe^ing  guidejs  ;  th'tis  the  de- 
viation from  fh^-directri:)n,,by  oTiC  oi-more  general 
guides,  need  not  mislead  tiiose  who  follow. 

191.  A  single  mounted -officer  may  saffice  to  assure 
the  dii*ection't)f  ft  column,  wLen  the  point  of  direc- 
tion towards  wliich  it  marbhes  is  very  distinct.  In 
this  ortfie,  that  officer  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of 
battle  within  thfit  point,  and  beyond  the  one  at  which 
the  h'ipad  of  the  column  will  halt,  and  remain  in  posi- 
tion till  the  column  halts ;  serving  thus  as  the  intei'- 
mediate  point  for  giving  sten^iness  to  the  march  of 
the  geucra-Lguides. 


16  SCHOOL  OF.  THE  BATTAIJitK-PAllT  HI. 

192.  For^a  column  oi^ne  o^  two  b^itl^lions,  mark- 
ers on  foot  will  siffirc^^  to  indujate  the  line  to  be  fol- 
lowed by  the  general  guides. 

M£i^arks  on  the  mliroii  ift  column. 


l9:>%AltliGu^h«  ttie'uncftdenced  step  be  that  of 
columns  in*  piTiite  marched,  and  ulso.tjjat  which  ought 
to  be  h<U)itmilly__  employed,  in*  the  Evolutions  of  the 
Line,  bec!!jise  itleavaa-  the  men'raore  at  ease,  and, 
consequoiitly,  is  better-adapted  to  movements  on  a 
large  scale  a^ijl  to  difficTllt  grounds,  neve;.-theless,  as 
i^this^of  panun^ttnt  impoistance*to  confirm-  soldiers-  in 
the  measureTand  tbe^nijovement  «f  the  ca'jenced  pace, 
i\x&  route  step  will  be  but"  little  practiced  in  the  ex- 
ercises by  battalion,  except  in  gLjiiTg  to,- and  return- 
ing from,  the  grounil  of  iilstrucfion,  gnd.for  teaclring 
the  mechanism  and  ihoVcmeAtS' of  "columns  in  route. 


J94.  It  is  highly  e'seentialto  the'regirtarity,of  the 
march  in  coUumi  that  ea<'h  gil.ide  foiluw  exactly  in 
the  trace  of  thQ  one  immediat-ely  pi-cct^ding,  without 
occupying  his  attention  witfh  the  general  directipu  of 
the  guides.  If  this  principle  be  sj;eadily  observed, 
the  guides  will  -find  theipselves  aligned,  provided  that 
the  leading  one  march  exactly  in  the  direction  indi- 
cated to  him-;  and  even  should  obstacles  ii>  his  way 
force  him, into  a  momentary  deviation,  the  direction 
of  the  column  would  not  necessarily  be  changed  i 
whereas,  if  the  following  guides  endeavor  to  conform 
themselves  at  once  to  all  the  movements  of  the  lead- 
ing one,  in  order  to  coVer  him  in-  fil«^  4uch  endeavors 
would  necessarily  cause    correspoiKhng  fluotuations 


j£2- 


P-3i> 


\\ 


MA  V 


TT" 


k=^ 


1 


H H      ^     ^^ ^ > 

^ i^         r-r:-::3 

^ „..j^        r~— ? 


SCHOOL  OF  fl  HE  RATTALIf'N—rART  III.  47 

in  the  (Toiamn  from  ri^ht-to  Jeft,  and  from  left  to 
right,  "nnd  j-ender  the  presei'vation  of  distances  ex- 
tremely diffic'flt.  . 

*  •     •  •      ■ 

105.  As  a  congequQwce  of'the.princiTfley.  that  <iUQh 

guide  s^Iuill  exactly  follow 'in* the  trace  of  '  the,  one 
tcho  immediately  ;)?-erer/fs'i ft  pending  the  m:irch  of  Ihe 
Cdluinn,  th(!  eulunel  ah'Sil  give  a  new  point'yf  direc- 
tion, to(»  near  to  the  first  to  requireTi  torrnnl  chiTtige 
of  direction,  the  >ea(fiMg  guide,  advancing  the  oue  or 
the  other  shoulder,  will  iiifmediately  direct  Jijms^f 
on  this  point  ;  the  other  guides  will  only  coflrorm 
themselves  to  this  movement  as  each  arrives  at  the 
point  at  which  the  first  had  execirt>'d  it.  Each  pub- 
division  will  cf)nf(U'm  itself  f(7  the  movei!ient  of  its 
guide,  the  me<i  insa^isibly  lengthening  or  sbortenitig 
the  sti^p,  and  advancing  or  refusing  ftlV'**^^'i"S  back) 
the  shoulder  oppositti  to  the  gtride.  but  without  losing 
the  touch  of  the  elbow  towards  his  side. 

196.  The^coliimn,  by  compa^iy,  .being  in  march,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to*  diminish  front  by  platoon, 
from  front  to  rear,  at  once,  and  to  increase  front  by 
platoon  iu  like  manner,  which  movemei^ts  will  hh 
commanded  and  executed  as  prescribect  in  .the  school 
of  the  company,  Nos.  282  ^nd  2^3  and  following, 
changing  the  command /or/n  company  iofonfi  compa- 
nies.. So  may  he  increase  and. diminish,  or  diminish 
and  increase  front,  accordihg  to  the  same  principles 
and  at  once,  by  company,  chailging  th»  command 
form  companies  t<»  form  Uiiisions^  and  the  command 
break  into  platoons  to  Ijj-eak  into  companies.  In  thi.s 
case,  the  compa-nies  and  divisions  will  execute  what 


49  .SCHOOL  OF  TIHO'I>AVrALl©N     PART  HI. 

is  prei>cribeifi»r  platoons'ahS  cdtnpanies  i'e«r*ectivc]y. 

UiT.' The  Cdlunin  beiii^.at  a  lialt,.  if  the  colonel 
skonld  wif?h  fo  march Jt\()  theT4ear,,an<i  the  distance 
tojbe  gained  he  so  inc<>n.sitl(ii-ableas  to  render  a  coun- 
tewnaj;clj  a  disproii(»rtiouate  loas  of  time,  he  will 
cai^e  the  column  to  face^  about,  and  tht  n  put  it  in 
ma1-ch  by  tlie  commands  ■prescribed  No.  J 64  ;  the 
chiefs  pt'  the  subdivision^  wilf  remain  behind  the 
froiit  -z'ank,  the  file  ctosefs  before  frije  rear  rank,  and 
the  guides,  will  step  into  the  rear  ran1\,  now  in  front. 
In  a  colujTin,  by  division,  the  junior  captains,  in  the 
intervals  between' companies,  will  replace  their  cov- 
ering sergeants  in  the 'rear  rank,  a-iid  these  sergeants 
will  step  into  the  line  of  file  close'rs  in  "front  of  their 
intervals.        »  *  ... 

ArTICLK    gECOND. 

Column  in  route.  ^ 

198.  A  -  column  in  route,  like  a  column  in  ma- 
noeuvrtv,  ought  never  to  have  a  depth  greater  than 
aboutthe''fr(nit  itliHcl  yccupied  in  the  line  of  battle, 
Jess  tlre^front  of  ii  subdivision. 

199.  The  observainct?  of  this  principle  requiiTs  no 
particular  rule  for  a  C(duftm  in  uuinceuvre  ;  but,  as  a 
coluujn  ir;  'route  rui^  have  hourly  to  "pass  narrow 
vk'ays,  bridges,  lor  otlier  d^les,  rendering  it  necessaty 
to  diminish  the  frost  of.  subdivisions,  it  becomes  im- 
portant to  give  ruk^s  ahd*  means  by  which  the  column 
may,  for*  any  length   of  "march  j-  pi"es«ii:ve  the  ease  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.    49 

the  route  step  v-'ithout  elougatioii  from  front  to  rear. 

200.  A  column  fn  route  will  bo  habitually  formed 
by  company. 

201.  When  a  column  in  route  shall  arrive  at  a  pass 
too  narrow  to  receive  the  front  of  a  company,  the 
column  ^vill  diminish  front  by  platoon  before  enter- 
ing. This  movement  \vHl  be,  executed  successively, 
or  by  all  the  companies  at  once. 

202.  If,  however,  the  defile  be  very  short,  and  it 
may  be  passed  by  the  diminution  of  a  few  files,  it 
will  be  preferable  to  break  to  the  rear  the  limited 
number  of  files. 

203.  The  column  being  bj  platoon,  and  the  want 
of  space  rendering  a  further  diminution  of  front  ne- 
cessary, it -will  be  diminished  by  section,  if  the  pla- 
toons be  of  twelve  or  more  files. 

204.  The  column  being  by  section,  will  continue  to 
march  by  that  front  as  long  as  the'defile  may  permit. 

205.  If  the  platoons  have  less  than  twelve  files, 
one  or  two  files  will  bo  broken  to  the  rear,  according 
to  the  narrowing  of  the  defile,  and  the  route  step  con- 
tinued as  long  as  six  files  can  march  abreast. 

206.  What  has  just  been  explained  for  breaking 
files  to  the  rear  in  a  column  by  platoon,  is  equally  ap- 
plicable to  a  column  by  section. 

207.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  permit  six  men 
to  march  abreast,  the  subdivisions  will  be  marched 
successively  by  the  flank,  conforming  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed Nos.  314  and  315,  school  of  the  company. 

203.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  will  be 

4* 


50  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III 

formed  into  column,  by  section,  by  .platoon,  or  by 
company,  as -soon  as  the  breadth  of. the  way  may 
permit  ;  the  several  mcvenieiits  wliieh  these  forma- 
tions include  will  be  executed  by  the  commands  of 
the  captains,  as  their  companies  successively  clear 
the  defile,  observing  the  ftdlowing  rules. 

209.  As  soon  as  the  way  is  sufficiently  broad  to 
contain  six  men  abreast,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  By  section  (or  by  platoon)  into  line.     2.  March. 

210.  At  the  command  march,  the  subdivisions  indi- 
cated will  form  themselves  into  line  ;  the  tiles  v,  hich 
have  not  been  able  to  enter,  will  follow  (by  tlir  tlaiik) 
the  last  four  files  of  their  subdivision  which  have  en- 
tered into  line. 

211.  The  column  marching  in  this  order,  the  files 
in  rear  will  be  caused  to  enter  into  line  as  the  in- 
creased breadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

212.  The  column  marching  by  section  or  by  pla- 
toon, platoons  or  companies  will  be  formed  as  soon 
as  the  breadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

213.  The  leading  subdivision  will  follow  the  wind- 
ings of  the  pass  or  defile  ;  the  following  subdivisions 
will  not  occupy  themselves  with  the  direction,  but 
all,  in  succession,  pass  over  the  trace  of  the  subdi- 
visions which  precede  them  respectively.  The  men 
will  not  seek  to  avoid  the  bad  parts  of  the  way,  but 
pass,  as  far  as  practicable,  each  in  the  direction  of 
his  file. 

214.  Changes  of  direction  will  always  be  made 
without  command  ;  if  the    change   be    important,  a 


SCHOOL  OF  T-HE  BATTALION— PART  111.  ^ 

caution  merely  from  the  respective  chiefs  to  their 
subdivisions  wiU  suffice,  and  the  rear  rank,  as  well  as 
the  tiles  broken  to  the  rear,  will  execute  successively 
the  movement  where  the  front  j-auk  had  executed  it. 

2J5.  The  cohtnel  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of 
the  battalion  ;  he  will  regulate  the  step  of  the  lead- 
ing subdivision,  and  indicate*  to  its  chief  the  instant 
for  executing  the  various  movements  which  the  na- 
ture of  the  route  may  render  necessary. 


21().  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  bat- 
talions, each  will  conform  itself,  in  its  turn,  to  what 
shall  have  been  commanded  for  the  leading  battalion, 
observing  to  execute  each  movement  at  the  ssCtne 
place,  and  in  the  same  manner. 

217.  Finally,  to  render  the  mechanism  of  all  those 
movements  familiar  to  the  troopis,  and  to  habituate 
them  to  march  in  the  route  step  without  elongating 
the  column,  commanders  will  generally  cause  their  bat- 
ta4ions  to  march  in  this  step,  going  to,  and  return- 
ing from,  fields  of  exercise.  Erich  will  occasionally 
conduct  his  battalion  through  narrow  passes,  in  order 
to  make  it  perceive  the  utility  of  the  principles  pre- 
scribed above  ;  and  he  will  several  times,  in  every 
course  of  instruction,  march  it  in  the  route  step,  and 
cause  to  be  executed,  sometimes  at  once,  and  some- 
times successively,  the  divers  movements  which  have 
just  been  indicated. 


6-2  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART 'III 

General  remarks  on  the  CQlumn  in  route. 

218.  The  lesson  relative  to  the  column  in  route  ia, 
by  its  frequent  application,  one  of  the  most  important, 
that  can  be  given  to  troops.  If  it  be  not  well  taught 
and  established  on  right  principles,  it  will  hapjien 
that  the  rear  of  the  column  in  route  will  be  obliged 
to  run,  to  regain  distanees,  or  that  the  front  will  be 
forced  to  halt  till  the  rear  shall  have  accomplished 
that  object ;  thus  rendering  the  march  greatly  slower, 
or  greatly  more  iatiguiug,  generally  both,  than  if  it 
were  executed  according  to  rule. 

219.  The  ordinary  progress  of  a  column  in  roJite 
ought  to  be,  on  good  roads  or  good  grounds,  at  the 
rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  paces  in  a  minute.  This 
rate  may  be  easily  maintained  by  columns  of  almost 
any  depth  ;  but  over  bad  roadi!,  ploughed  fields,  loose 
sands,  or  mountainous  districts,  the  progress  cannot 
be  so  great,  and  must  therefore  be  regulated  accord- 
ing to  circumstances. 

220.  The  most  certain  means  of  marching  \\c\\  in 
route,  is  to  preserve  always  a  regular  and  eq,ual 
morement,  and,  if  obstacles  oblige  one  or  more  sub- 
divisions to  slacken  or  to  shorten  the  step,  to  cause 
the  primitive  rate  of  march  to  be  resumed  the  mo- 
ment the  difficulties  are  passed.- 

221.  A  subdivision  ought  never  to  take  more  than 
the  prescribed  distance  from  the  subdivision  immedi- 
ately preceding  ;  but  it  is  sometimes-  necessary  to  les- 
sen that  distance. 

222.  Thus:  the  head  of  the  column  encounters  an 
obstacle  which  obliges  it  to  relax  its  march  ;  all  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  HI.  53 

following  subdirisioQs  will  preserve  the  habitual  step, 
and  close  up  in  mass,  if  necessary,  on  the  subdivision 
nearest  to  the  obstacle.  Distances  will  afterv^-ards 
naturally  be  recovered  as  each  subdivision  shall  suc- 
cessively have  passed  the  obstacle.  Nevertheless,  if 
the  difficulty  be  too  great  to  be  overcome  by  one  sub- 
division, whilst  the  next  is  closing  up,  so  that  dis- 
tances cannot  afterwards  be  recovered  without  run- 
ning, the  chief  of  the  column  will  halt  the  leading 
subdivision  beyond  the  obstacle,  at  a  distance  suffi- 
cient to  contain  the  whole  column  in  mass.  He  will 
then  put  the  column  in  march,  the  subdivisions  taking 
distances  by  the  head,  observing  to  GOmmence  the 
movement  in  time,  so  that  the  last  subdivision  may 
not  be  obliged  to  halt,  after  having  cleared  the  ob- 
stacle. 

223.  ^yhcn  the  chief  of  a  column  shall  wish  to 
change  the  rate  of  march,  he  Will  cause  the  leading 
battalion  to  quicken  ov  to  relax  the  step  insensibly, 
nnd  send  orders  to  the  other  battalions*  each  to  regu- 
late itself  by  that  which  precedes  it. 

224.  The  column  being  ccynposed  of  several  bat- 
talions, the  general-in-chief  will  always  leave  an  aid- 
de-camp  with  its  rear  to  bring  him  prompt  Informa- 
tion if  it  find  a  difficulty  in  following. 

■  225.  Subdivisions  (»ught  always  to  step  out  well  in 
obli(piing,  both  in  breaking  and  forming  companies  or 
platoons.  When  either  is  done  in  succession,  it  is 
highly  important  that  no  subdivision  slacken  or  shorten 
the  step,  whilst  that  which  precedes  it  is  engaged  in 
the  movement.  The  observstnee  of  this  principle  can 
alone  prevent  an  elongation  of  the  column. 

22G.  If  the  battalion,  marching  by  the  flank,  en- 


54  SCHOOL  OF  THE-  BATTALION-  PART  III. 

counter  a  pass  so  narrow  a«  to  oblige  it  to  defile  with 
a  front  of  two  men,  the  c^lonel  will  order  snpport 
arms,  t;ike  the  cadeuced  step,  and  nndouble  the  files, 
which  willJje  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
company,  ■l5'o.  3*26  ;  the  files  will  double  again  as  soon 
as  the  breadth  of  the  way  will  permit. 

227.  If  the  defile  be  only  sufficient  to  receive  a 
front  of  one  man,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  men  to 
pass  one  at  a  time.  The  men  of  the  same  file  should 
follow  each  other  in  their  order  as  closely  as  possible, 
and  without  loss  of  time.  As  soon  as  the  defile  per- 
mits a  front  of*  two  or /our  men,  the  battalion  will  be 
reformed  into  two  or  four  ranks,  and  will  march  in 
tills  order  until  there  bo  space  to  form  platoons  or 
sections,  as  indicated  No.  2U9. 

228.  In  bot'h  cases,  ju«t  suppoised,  the  head  of  the 
battlion,  after  having  passed  the  defile,  will  march 
till  sufficient* space  be  left  to  contain  the  whole  of  the 
subdivisions  in  mass;  afterwards  it  wilt- be  put  in 
march  by  the  means  indicated  No.  222. 

229.  When  a  m)mmand  has  to  move  rapidly  oyer  a 
given  distance,  the  movements  prescribed  in  this 
article  will  be  executed  in  double  quick  time  ;  if  the 
distance  be  long,  the  chief  of  the  column  will  uot 
allow  the  march  at  this  gait  to  be  continued  for  more 
than  fifteen  minutes  ;  at  the  end  of  this  time,  he  will 
order  the  ordinary  route  step  to  be  marched  for  five 
minutes,  and  then  again  resume  the  double  quick.  If 
the  ground  be  uneven,  having  considerable  ascents 
and  descents,  he  will  reserve  the  double  quick  for 
those  parts  of  the  ground  most  favorable  to  this 
march. 


1. 

^ 

-i- 

■'%^    • 

1     i 

.k   ,•    ^ 

1 1 

^^   ^!:,!ii;',:iBftiSf 

i 

.    .                 S3ii,«i:.ffiiii^' 

'■  -iii?:;';ii'';3;;ii^ 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IIL  55 

230.  A  column  marchiiio:  alternately  in  double 
quick  time  and  tlie  ordinary  route  step,  in  the  iTian- 
uer  stated j  can  easily  accomplish  very  long  dis- 
tances in  a  very  short  space  of  time  ;  but  when  tiie 
distance  to  be  passed  over  be  not  greater  than  two 
miles,  it  ought  to  be  accomplished,  when  the  ground 
is  favorable,  without  changing  the  rate  of  inarch. 


Article  Third, 


To  change  direction  in  column  at  full  distance. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march  in  the  cadenced- 
step,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change 
direction,  he  will  go  to  the  point  at  which  the  change 
ought  to  be  commenced,  and  establish  a  marker 
there,  presentiug  the  breast  to  the  flank  of  the  col- 
umn ;  tbis  marker,  no  matter  to  which  side  the 
change  of  direction's  to  b^  made,  will  be  posted  on 
the  opposite  side,  and  he  Wnll  remain  in  posititm  till 
the  last  subdivision  of  the  battalion  shall  have  passed 
The  leading  subdivision  b^ing  within  a  few  paces  of 
the  marker,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  right.) 

232.  At  this,  the  chief  of  the  leading  subdivision 
will  immediate4y  take  the  guide  on  the  side  opposite 
the  change  of  direction,  if  not  already  there.  This 
guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  graze  the  breast  of 
the  marker ;  arrived  at  this  point  the  chief  will  cause 
his  subdivision  to  change  direction  by  the  commands 


56  SCHOOL  <.'F  THE  EATTALIO.N— PART  III. 

and  according  ito  the  piinciples  prescribed  in  the 
schoM  of  the  company.  When  the  wheel  is  com- 
pletod,  the  cliief  of  this  subdivision  will  retake  the 
guide,  if  changed,  on  the  side  of  the  primitive  di- 
rection. 

233.  The  chief  of  eajch  succeeding  subdivision,  as 
well  as  the  guides,  will  contorm  to  what  has  just 
been  explained  for  the  leading  subdivision. 

•  234,  The  colonel  will  carefully  see  that  the  guide 
of  each  subdivision,  in  wheeling,  does  not  throw  him- 
self without  or  within,  but  passes  overall  the  points 
of  the  arc  of  the  circle,  which  ho  ought  to  describe. 

235.  As  often  as  no  distinct  object  presents  itself 
in  the  new  direction,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  place 
himself  upon  it  in  advance,  at  the  distance  of  thirty 
or  forty  paces  from  the  markei-,  and  be  assured  in 
this  direction  by  the  colonel ;  tlie  leading  guide  will 
take,  the  moment  he  shall  have  .changed  direction, 
two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight  line  which, 
drawn  from  himself,  would  pass  between  the  heels  of 
the  lieutenant  colonel,  taking,  afterwards,  new  points 
as  he  advances. 

236,  The  major  will  see  that  the  guides  direc, 
themselves  on  the  marker  posted  at  the  point  o 
change,  so  as  to  graze  his  breast. 

237.- If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battal- 
ions, the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second,  will  cause 
the  marker  of  the  first  battali<ui,  to  be  replaced  as 
soon  as  the  last  subdivision  of  this  battalion  shall 
have  passed  ;  this  disposition  will  be  observed  by  bat- 
talion after  battalion,  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 


SCHOOL  OD  THE  BATTALP  N— PART  HI.  57 

Remarks. 

238.  It  has  been  demonstrated,  school  of  the  com- 
pany, how  important  it  is,  first,  that  each  subdivision 
execute  its  chant^e  of  direction  precisely  at  tlie  point 
where  the  leading  one  had  changed,  and  that  it  ar- 
rive in  a  square  with  the  direction ;  second,  that  the 
wheeling  point  ought,  always,  to  be  cleared  in  time, 
in  order  that  the  subdivision  engaged  in  the  wheel  may 
not  arrest  the  movement  of  the  following  one.'  The 
deeper  the  column,  the  more  rigorously  ought  these 
principles  to  be  observed  ;  because  a  lault  that  would 
be  but  slight  in  a  column  of  a  single  battalion,  would 
cause  much  embarrassment  in  one  of  great  depth. 


Article  Fourth. 


To  halt  the  column. 

230.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  coloue 
shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Column.    2.  Halt. 

240.  At  th-^  second  command,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  column  willhalt ;  no  guide  will  stir, 
th(mgh  he  may  have  lost  his  distance,  or  be  out  of  the 
direction  of  the  preceding  guides. 

241.  The  column  being  in  march,  in  doublfi  quick 
time,  will  be  halted  by  the  same  commands.     At  the 


53  SCflOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIQN— PART  IH. 

conuiifiml  halt,  the  men  will  hylt  in  their  places,  and 
will  themselves  rectify  their  positions  in  the  ranks. 

242,  The  column  being  halted,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  he  will  move 
a  little  in  front  of  the  letuliui,^  guide,  and  face  to  him ; 
this  guide  and  the  following  one  will  fix  their  eyes  on 
the  colonel,  iu  order  promptly  to  conform  themselves 
to  his  directions. 

343.  If  the  colonel  judge  it  not  necessary  to  give  a 
general  direction  to  the  guides,  he  will  limit  himself 
to  rectifying  the  position  of  such  as  may  be  without, 
or  within  the  direction,  by  the  command  guide  of 
(such)  company,  or  guides  of  (such)  companies,  to 
the  right,  for  to  the  left ; )  at  this  command,  the  guides 
designated  will  place  theuiselves  on  the  direction  ; 
the  others  will  stand  fast. 

244.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  colonel  judge  it  ne- 
cessary to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of  the 
column,  he  will  place  the  first  two  on  the  direction 
he  shall  have  chosen,  and  conmiaud  : 

Guides  cover. 

245,  At  this,  the  following  guides  will  promptly 
place  themselves  on  the  direction  covering  the  first 
two  in  file;  and  each  precisely  at  a  distance  equal  to 
the  front  of  his  company,  from  the  guide  immedi- 
ately preceding  ;  the  litmtenant  'colonel  will  assure 
them  in  the  direction,  and  the  colonel  will  command  : 

9 

Left  (or  right)— Dress. 


SCH^'OL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  Jll.  59 

240,  At  this  command,  each  company  will  incline 
to  the  right  or  left,  and  dress  fonvai-d  or  backward, 
so  as  to  bring  the  desigm^ted  flank  to  rest  on  its 
guide;  each  captain  wilT  place  himself  two  paces 
outside  of  his  guide,  promptly  align  his  company 
parallelly  with  that  w^hich  precedes,  then  coujuiand 
Front,  and  return  to  his  phice  in  column. 

247.  Finally,  if  the  general  guides  march  on  the 
flank  of  the  column,  the  colonel,  having  halted  it, 
will  place  himself  in  rear  of  the  color-bearer,  to  as- 
certain whether  the  leading  general  guide  and  the 
color-bearer  be  exactly  on  the  direction  of  the  two 
points  in  advance,  and  establish  them  on  that  direc- 
tion if  they  Joe  not  already  qn  it ;  the  major  will  do 
the  like,  in  respect  to  the  general  guide  in  the  rear  ; 
which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    Gmm/cs— On  THF,   LINIE. 

248.  At  this  command  the  guide  of  each  company 
of  the  directing  flank  will  step  promptly  into  the 
direction  of  the  general  guides,  and  face  to  the  front. 
The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  in  fi-ont  of,  and  facing 
to,  the  leading  general  guides,  and  the  major,  placed 
in  rear  or  the  rearmost  niue,  will  promptly  align  the 
company  guides. 

240.  The  colonel,  having  verified  the  direction  of 
the  guides,  will  command  : 

Left  (or  ripjit) — Dress. 

250,  This  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  246. 


60  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  Ul 

Remarks. 

251.  The  means  indicated,  No.  244,  and  f(ill(»wing, 
for  giving  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of  a  col- 
umn, at  full  distance,  Avill  apply  onl}'  to  a  column 
composed  of  two,  or  at  most,  three  battalions.  If 
the  number  be  more  numerous,  its  chief  will  cause 
the  colors  and  general  guides  of  all  the  battalions  to 
step  out  and  place  themselves  on  the  direction  which 
he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  column,  as  is  explained  in 
the  evolutions  of  the  line. 

Article  Fifth. 
To   dose   the   column   to   half  distance,  or  in    mass. 

252.  A  column  by  company  being  at  full  distance 
rigl)t  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance,  on  the  lead- 
ing company,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To   half  distance,   close  column.      2.  MARCH   (or 

double  quick — March.) 

253.  At  the  fi;-st  commaiid,  the  captain  of  the 
leading  company  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast. 

554.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  re- 
peated by  all  the  captains,  except  the  captain  of  the 
leading  company,  this  company  will  stand  fast,  and 
its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left ;  the  file  closers  will 
close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.  61 

255.  All  the  other  compan'es  will  continue  to 
mfirch,  and  as  each  in  succession  arrives  at  platoon 
distance  from  the  one  which  precedes,  its  captain  will 
halt  it. 

256.  At  .the  instant  that  each  company  halts,  its 
guide  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  guides 
who  precede,  and  the  captain  will  align  the  company 
by  the  left;  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon 
the  rear  rank. 

257.  No  particular  attention  need  be  given  to  the 
general  direction  of  the  guides  before  they  respec- 
tively halt ;  it  will  suffice  if  each  follow  in  the  trace 
of  the  oue  who  precedes  him. 

258.  The  colonel  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  will  su- 
perintend the  execution  of  the  movement,  observing 
that  the  captains  halt  their  companies  exactly  at  pla- 
toon distance  the  one  from  the  other. 

259.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  a  few  paces  in  front, 
will  foce  to  the  leading  guide  and  assure  the  posi- 
tions of  the  following  guides  as  they  successively 
place  themselves  on  the  direction. 

260.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  inst  guide. 

261.  If  the  column  be  in  uiareh,  the  colone4  will 
cause  it  to  close  by  tfie  same  commands. 

262  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  at  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing C(»mpany  will  command  quick  time;  the  chiefs  of 
the  other  companies  will  caution  them  to  continue 
their  march. 

263.  At  the  command  marc/«,  the  leading  company 
will  march  in  quiet,  and  the  other  companies  in 
double   quick   time ;  and  as  each  arrives  at  platoon 


62     SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  HI. 

distance  from  the  preceding  one,  its  chief  will  cause 
it  to  marcii  in  quick  time, 

2G4.  When  the  rearmost  company  shall  have  gain- 
ed its  distance,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Double  quick — March. 

265.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  the  column 
and  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance  at  the  same 
tiine^he  will  notify  the  captain  of  the  leading  com- 
pany of  his  intention,  who  at  the  command  ?)<«rc/i,  will 
halt  his  company  and  align  it  by  the  left. 

266.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and 
the  col(»nel  should  not  give  the  command  double 
quick,  the  captain  of  the  leading  -company  will  halt 
his  company  at  the  command  march,  and  align  it  by 
the  left.  In  the  case,  where  the  colonel  adds  the 
command  double  quick,  the  captains  of  companies  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  262,  and  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  as  indicated  No.  263. 

To  close  the  column  on  the  eighth,  or  rearmost 

company. 
« 

267.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  instead  of  caus- 
ing it  to  close  to  half  distance  on  the  first  company, 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  close  on  the 
eighth,  he  will  command : 

1.  On  the  eighth  company,  to  half  distance  close  column. 
2.  Battalion  about— FACE.  3.  Golumn  forward. 
4.  Guide  right.  5.  Maii€H  for  double  quick — 
March.) 


6£_ 


MnuiiiyniiiiiiHinillIp 
HiiiliMliilliH 


niii!iiiiiii!('i;ij!iiiiiin«p 

MP!!i;ilHli|ir!lillllHIP 
M;!"aHtl:".i"!MIM!M 


H               P 

U               P 

■       ;- 

^_.. 

H 

i 

q  " 

M 

i 

M. 

K 

'i 

H 

q-- 

JJ 

M 

H 

HTz: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  HL  63 

268.  At  the  second  commancl,  all  the  companies  ex- 
cept the  eighth,  will  face  about,  and- their  guides  %yill 
remain  in  the  front  rank,  now  the  rear. 

269.  At  the  fourth  command,  all  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  two  paces  outside  of  their  com- 
panies on  the  directing  flank. 

270.  At  the  command  march,  the  eighth  company 
will  stand  fast,  and  its  cai)tain  will  align  it  by  the 
left,  the  (»ther  companies  will  put  theinselv.es  in 
march,  and,  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from 
the  one  established  before  it,  its  captain  will  halt  it 
and  face  it  to  the  front.  At  the  moment  that  each 
company  halts,  the  left  guide,  remaining  faced  to  the 
rear,  will  place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction  of 
the  guides  already  established.  Immediately  after 
the  captain  will  align  his  company  by  the  left,  and 
the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  on  the  rear  rank. 
If  this  movement  be  executed  in  double  quick  time, 
each  captain,  in  turn,  will  halt,  and  command:  Such 
company,  right  about — Halt.  At  this  command,  the 
company  designated  will  face  to  the  right  about  and 
halt. 

271.  All  the  companies  being  aligned,  the  colonel 
will  cause  the  guides,  who  stand  faced  to  the  rear, 
to  face  about. 

272.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placing  himself  behind 
the  rearmost  guide,  will  assure  successively  the  posi- 
tions of  the  other  guides,  as  prescribed  No.  259  ;  the 
major  will  remain  abreast  with  the  rearmost  com- 
pany. 

273.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  close  it  on  the  eighth  company,  he  will 
command : 


64     SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION- PART  HI. 

1.  On  the  eighth  company,  to  half  distance,  close  column. 
2.  Battalion  right  about.  3.  MARCH  (or  double 
quick — Makch.)     4.   Guide  right. 

274.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the 
eighth  comically  will  caution  his  company  that  it  will 
remain  faced  to  the  front;  the  captains  of  the  other 
companies  will  caution  their  companies  that  they 
will  have  to  face  about. 

275.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the 
eighth  company  will  halt  his  company  and  align  it  by 
the  left;  the  file  closers  will  clo!>e  one  pace  upon  the 
rear  rank. 

276.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies,  at  the 
same  cenunand,  will  place  themselves  on  the  tlank  of 
the  column ;  the  subdivisions  will  face  about,  and  as 
each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  company 
immediately  preceding  it,  its  chief  will  face  it  to  the 
front  and  halt  it  as  prescribed  No.  270,  The  instant 
each  company  halts,  the  guide  t»n  the  directing  flank, 
remaining  faced  to  the  rear,  will  quickly  place  him- 
self on  the  direction  of  the  guides  already  established. 
After  which,  the  captain  will  align  the  company  by 
the  left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon 
the  rear  rank. 

277.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  follow  the  move- 
ment abreast  of  the  first  company.  The  njajor  will 
place  himself  a  few  paces  in  rear  of  the  guide  of 
the  eighth  company,  and  will  assure  successively  the 
puisilion  of  the  other  guides. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IIL  65 

Remarks. 

278.  A  column  by  division  at -full  distance  will  close 
to  half  distance  by  the  same  menns  and  the  same 
commands. 

279.  A  column  by  company,  or  by  division,  being 
at  full  or  half  distance,  the. colonel  will  cause  it  to 
close  in  inass  by  the  same  means  and  command's,  sitb- 
stitutiug  the  indication  column,  close  in  7nass,  fOr 
that  of  to  half  distance,  close  column.  Each  chief  of 
subdivision  will  conform  himself  to  all  that  has  just 
been  prescribed,  except  that  he  will  not  halt  his  sub- 
division till  its  guide  shall  be  at  a  distance  of  six 
paces  from  the  guide  of  the  subdivision  next  preced- 
ing. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  fnmt,  these  various  move- 
ments will  be  executed,  on  the  same  principles. 

Article  Sixth. 

To  march  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass. 

281.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being 
at  a  halt,  the  colonel  will  put  it  in  march  by  the  com- 
mands prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

282..  The  means  cf  direction  will  also  be  the  same 
for  a  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  as  fyr  a  col- 
un.n  at  full  distance,  except  that  the  general  guides 
■will  not  step  out. 

28-^.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being 
in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he 
5* 


66  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IH. 

will  give  the  couiinands  prescribed  for  halting  a.  col- 
umn at  full  distance,  and  if,  afterwards,  he  judge  it 
necessary  to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of 
the  column,  he  will  en)ijlov,  to  this  end,  the  com- 
mands and  means  indicated,  No.  244  and  following. 

284.  In  columns  at  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass, 
chiefs  of  subdivisions  will  repeat  the  commands  warcA, 
and  halt,  as  in  columns  at  full  distance. 

285.  The  colonel  will  often  march  the  column  to 
the  rear,  by  the  means  and  commands  prescribed 
Nos.  170  and  171.. 

286.  A  column  by  division  or  company,  w^hether  at 
full  or  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass,  at  a  halt  or 
marching,  can  be  faced  to  the  right  or  left,  and  march- 
ed off  in  the  new  direction. 


Article  Seventh. 


To  change  direction  in  column  at  half  distance. 

287.  A  column  at  half  distance,  being  in  march, 
will  change  direction  by  the  same  commands  and  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  as  a  column  at  full  dis- 
tance; but  as  the  distance  between  the  subdivisions 
is  less,  the  pivot  man  in  each  subdivision  will  take 
steps  of  fourteen  inches  instead  of  nine,  and  of  seven- 
teen inches  instead  of  eleven,  according  to  the  gait, 
in  order  to  clear,  in  time,  the  wheeling  point,  and  the 
marching  flank  will  describe  the  arc  of  a  larger  cir- 
cle, the  better  to  facilitate  the  movement. 


J£. 


j'jy- 


i 

^ 

y 

^ 

H 

H                       Y 

^4 


- 

,          y.           ,. 

> 

- 

H 

-: 

.■-. 

._     __P 

T 

'H 

V- 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.  67 

Article  EicnTiL 

To  change^  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass. 
1st.   To  change  direction  in  marching. 

288.  A  cohimn  by  divisiou,  closed  in  mass,  being  in 
march,  will  change  direction  by  the  front  of  subdivi- 
sions. 

289.  Whether  the  change  be  made  to  the  reverse, 
or  to  the  pivot  flank,  it  will  always  be  executed  on 
the  principles  of  wheeling  in  mnrchiug;  to  this  end, 
the  colonel  will  first  cause  the  battalion  to'take  the 
guide  on  the  flank  opposite  to  the  intended  change  of 
direction,  if  it  be  not  already  on  that  flank. 

290.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  right  in 
front,  having  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  the 
colonel,  after  having  caused  a  marker  to  be  placed  at 
the  point  where  the  change  ought  to  commence,  will 
command : 

1.  Battalion,  right  wheel.     2.  MARCH. 

291.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  division 
will  wheel  as  if  it  were  part  of  a  column  at  half 
distance. 

292.  The  instant  that  this  division  commences  the 
wheel,  all  the  others  will,  at  once,  conform  them- 
selves to  its  movement;  to  this  end  the  left  giiide  of 
each,  advancing  slightly  the  left  shoulder  and  length- 
ening a  little  the  step,  will  incline  to  the  left,  and  will 


68  SCHOOL  OF  TPIE  BATTALION— PART  III. 

observe,  at  the  same  time^to  gain  so  much  ground  to 
the  front  that  there  may  constantly  be  an  interval  of 
four  paces  between  his  division  and  that  which  pro- 
ceeds it;  and  as  soon  as  he  yluill  cover  the  preceding 
guide,  he  will  cease  to  incline  and  then  march  exactly 
in  his  trace. 


293.  Each  division  will  conform  itself  to  the  move- 
ment of  its  guide  ;  the  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow 
towards  him  and  advance  a  little  th«  left  shoulder  the 
instant  the  movement  common-ces;  each  file  in  inclin- 
ing, wall  gain  so  much  the  less  ground  to  the  front, 
as  the  file  shall  be  nearer  to  the  pivot,  and  the  right 
guide  will  gain  only  so  much  as  may  be  necessaiy  to 
maintain  between  his  own  and  the  preceding  division 
the  same  distance  which  separates  their  marching 
flanks. 

294.  Each  chief  of  division,  turning  to  it,  will  regu- 
late its  march,  and  see  that  it  remains  constantly  in- 
cluded between  its  guides,  that  its  alignment  con- 
tinues nearly  parallel  tothat  of  the  preceding  division, 
and  that  the  centre  bends  only  a  little  to  the  rear. 

295.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  movement, 
and  cause  the  pivot  of  the  leading  division  to  length- 
en or  to  shorten  the  step,  conforming  to  the  principle 
established,  school  of  the  company,  No.  227— if  either 
be  necessary  to  facilitate  tlie  movement  of  the  other 
divisions. 

296.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  near  the  left 
guide  of  the  leading  division,  will  regulate  his  march. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  HI.  GO 

and  take  care,  above  all,  that  he  does  not  throw  him- 
self icithin  the  arc  he  oug-ht  to  describe. 

297.  The. major,  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  guides' 
will  see  that  the  last  three  conform  themselves,  each, 
by  slight  degrees,^to  the  movement  of  the  guide  im- 
mediately preceding,  and  that  neither  inclines  too 
much  in  the  endeavor  to  cover  too  promptly  the  guide 
in  his  front;  he  will  rectify  any  serious  fault  that  may 
be  committed  in  either  of  those  particulars. 

298.  The  colouelj  seeing  the  wheel  nearly  ended, 
will  command :  ' 

1.  Fonca'rd.    2.  March. 


299.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  tlie  leading  division  completes  its  wheel, 
it  will  resume  the  direct  march ;  the  other  divisions 
will  conform  themselves  to  this  movement;  and  if 
any  guide  find  himself  not  covering  his  immediate 
leader,  he  will,  by  slight  degrees,  bring  himself  on  the 
trace  of  that  guide,  by  advancing  the  right  shoulder, 

300.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  has  to  change 
direction  k)  the  left,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  it  to 
take  the  guide  to  the  right,  and  then  command: 

1.  Battalion,  left  icliccl.     2,  March. 

301,*  At  the  c(»mm^nd  7>?<?rf/t,  the  battalion  will 
change  directi(»n  to  the  left,  according  to  the  princi- 
ples just  prescribed,  and  by  inverse  means, 

302.  When   the  battalion  shall  have  resumed  the 


70  SCHOOL-  OF  THE  BATTAL10N-J.^ART  JH. 

direct  mfirch,  the  colonel  will  change  the  guide  to  the 
left,  on  seeing  the  last  three  guides  nearly  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  one  in  front.- 

303.  The  foregoing  changes  of  direction  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  in  a  col- 
umn, left  in  front. 

304.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  will 
phange  direction,  in  marching,  by  the  commands  and 
meaiis  indicated  for  a  column  by  division. 

305.  The  guide  who  is  the  pivot  of  the  particular 
w^heel,. ought  to  maintain  himself  at  his  usual  distance 
of  six  prices  from  the  guide  who  precedes  him;  if  this 
distance  be  not  exactly  preserved,  the  divisions  would 
necessarily  becouie  confounded,  which  must  be  care- 
fully avoided. 

2d.    To  change  direction  from  a  halt. 

306.  A'column  by  company,  or  by  division,  closed 
in  mass,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  give  it  a  new  dii-ection,  and  in  which  it  is  to  re- 
main, he  will  caus^  it  to  execute  this  movement  by 
the  flanks  of  subdivisions,  in  the  following.manner; 

■  307.  The  battalion  having  the  right  in  front,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  t^  cause  it  to  change  direction 
by  the  right  flank,  he  wi'l  indicate  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  the  point  of  direction  to  the  right;  this  oflicer 
will  immediately  establish,  on  the  new  direction,  two 
markers,  distant  from  each  otFier  a  little  less  than  the 
front  of  the  first  subdivision,  the  first  marker  in  Iront 
of  the  right  file  of  this  subdivision  ;  which  being  exe- 
cuted heWill  command: 


..^'^f 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIQN—PART  III.  71 

1.  Change  direction  by  the  right  flank.  2.  Battalion, 
right — ^Face.  3.  March  [or  double  quick — 
March.] 

308.  At  the  second  command,  t4ie  column  will  fiice 
to  the  right,  and  each  chief  of  subdivision  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

309.  At  the  command  mareh,  all  the  subdivisions 
will  step  off  together;  the  ri^ht  guide  of  the  lending 
one  v.ill  direct  himself  from  the  first  step,  paiiiUelly 
t»the  markers  placed  in  advance  on  the  uew  direc- 
tion ;  the  chief  of  the  subdivision  will  not  follow  the 
movement,  but  sea  it  file  past,  and  as  soon  as  the  left 
guide  shall  have  passed,  he  will  command : 

1.  First  company  [or  flrst  division.^     2.  Halt. 

3.  Front.    4.  left— Dress. 

310^  At  the  fourth  command,  the  subdivision  will 
place  itself  against  the  two  markers,  and  be  promptly 
aligned  by  its  chief. 

311.  The  right  guide  of  each  of  the  following  sub- 
divisions will  conform  himself  to  the  direction  of  the 
right  guide  of  the  subdivision  preceding  his  own  in 
the  column,  so  as  to  enter  on  the  new  direction  par- 
allelly  to  that  subdivision,  and  at  the  distance  of  four 
paces  from  its  rear-  rank. 

312.  Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  halt  '}u  his  own 
person,  on  arriving  opposite  to  the  left  guides  already 
placed  on  the  new  direction,  see  his  subdivision  file 
past,  and  conform  himself,  in  halting  and  aligning  it, 
to  what  i«  prescribed  No.  309, 


7.i  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALJON— PAJIT  HI. 

313.  If  the  change  oC  direction  b^^  by  the  left  flank, 
the  cohmel  will  cau«e  niar^pers  to  be  estJiblished  as 
before,  the  first  in  front  of  the  left  file  of  the  lead- 
ing si^bdivision,  and  then  gire  the  same  commands, 
substituting  th'^  indication  left  for  rigid. 

314.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  subdivisions 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  each  chief  will  place  himself 
by  the  side  of  his  left  guide. 

315.  At  the  commtfnd.  march,  all  the  subivisious 
will  step  off  together,  each  conducted  by  its  chief.    • 

316.  The  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  will  di- 
rect himself,  from  the''  first  step,  parallelly  to  the 
markers  ;  the  subdivision  will  be  conducted  by  its 
chief;  and  as  soon  as  its  left  guide  shall  have  passed 
the  second  marker,  it  will  be  halted  and  aligned  as 
prescribed  above;  and  so  of  each  ot  the  following 
subdivisions. 

317.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  on  the  designa- 
ted flank,  to  see  that  each  subdivision  enters  the  new 
direction  parallely  to  the  leading  one,  and  at  the  pre- 
scribed distance  from  that  which  precedes. 

318  The  lieutenant  colonel  wdll  place  himself  in 
front  of,  and  facing  to,  the  guide  of  the  leading  sub- 
division, and  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  follow- 
ing guidtis,  as  they  successively  arrive  on  the  new  di- 
rection. 

319.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  last  subdivision. 

320.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  executed 
with  facility  and  precision,  it  is  necessary  that  tHe 
leading  subdivision  should  entire>y  unmask  the  col- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  JII.  73 

umn  ;  for  example  the  ^iiovement  being  made  by  the 
right  flank,  it  is  necessary  before  halting  the  leading 
subdivision,  that  its  left  guide  shall,  at  least,  have  ar- 
rived at  the  place  previously  occupied  by  its  right 
guide,  in  order  that  each  following  subdivision  w'hich 
has  to  pass  over  a  space  at  least  equal  to  its  front  to 
put  itself  in  the  new  direction,  and  whose  left  ought 
to  pass  the  point  at  \Vliich  the  right  had  rested,  may, 
at  the  command  halt,  find  itself  iu  its  whole  front, 
parallel  to  the  leading  subdivision. 

321.  By  this  method  there  is  no  direction  that  may 
not  be  giveu  to  a  column  iu  mass. 


Article  N^tii. 

Being  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  to 
take  distances. 

32"J.  A  column  at  half  distance  \\ill  take  full  dis- 
tance by  the  head  of  the  column  when  it  has  to  pro- 
long itself  on  the  line  of  battle.  If  oii  the  contrary, 
it  has  to  lorm  itself  in  line  of  battle  on  the  ground  it 
occupies,  it  will  take  distances  on  the  leading  or  on 
the  rearmost  subdivision,  according  as  the  one  or 
other  may  find  itself  at  the  point  where  the  right 
or  left  of  the  battalion  ought  to  rest  iu  line  of  battle. 

1st.   To  take  distances  by  the  head  of  the  column. 

323.  The  column  being  by  company  at  half  distance 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  coloael  shall  wish  to  cause  it 


74  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALI-'N^PART  III. 

to  take  full  distances  by  the  head,  be  will  command: 
By  the  head  of  column,  taJc(Licheeling\Hstance. 

324.  At  this  command,  tbo  captain  of  tbe  leading 
company  will  put  in  marcb  ;  to  tbis  end,  be  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  First    company,  foncard.      2.  Guide  left.     3, 
Marcji  [or  double  quick— ^Iarcii.^ 

325.  Wben  tbo  second  sbiill  have  nearly  its  wbeel-  > 
ing  distance,  its  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Second  company,  foncard.     2.   Guide  left.     3. 
March  [or  double  quick— '^l Alien. '\ 

326.  At  tbe  command  march,  wbicb  will  be  pro- 
nounced at  tbe  instant  tbat  tbis  company  sball'bave 
its  wbeelihg  distance,  it  will  step  off  smartly,  taking 
the  step  from  tbe  preceding  company.  JEach  of  tbe 
other  companies  will  successively  execute  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

327.  Tbe  colonel  will  see  tbat  each  company  piits 
tself  in  marcb  at  tbe  instant  it  has  its  distance. 

328.  Tbe  lieutenant  colonel  will  bold  himself  at  tbe 
bead  of  the  column,  and  direct  the  marcb  of  the. lead- 
ing guide. 

329.  The  major  will  bold  himself  abreast  with  the 
rearmost  guide. 

330.  If  the  column,  instead  of  being  at  a  halt,  be 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  HL  75 

in  march,  the  colonel  will  give  the  same  commands, 
and  add : 

March  L<^i'  double  quick — March.] 

331.  If  fhe  column  be  marchiTio:  in  quick  time,  at 
the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  leading  com- 
pany will  cause  double  quick  time  to  be  taken;  which 
will  also  be  done  by  the  other  captains  as  the  com- 
panies successively  attain  their  proper  wheeling  dis- 
tance. 

332.  If  the  column  be  marching  in.  double  quick 
time,  the  leading  company  will  continue  to  march  at 
the  same  gait.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies 
will  causie  quick  time  to  be  taken,  and  as  each  compa- 
ny gains  its  proper  distance,  its  captain  will  cause  it 
to  retake  the 'double  quick  step. 

2d.    To  take  distances  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

333.  If  the  colonel  wish  to  take  distances  on  the 
rearmost  company,  he  will  establish  two  markers  on 
the  direction  he  shall  wish  to  give  to  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, the  first  opposite  to  the  rearmost  company,  the 
second  marker  towards  the  head  of  the  column,  at 
company  distance  from  the  first,  and  both  facing  to 
the  roar;  at  the  same  time,  the  right  general  guide, 
on  an  intimation  from  the  lieutenant  colonel,  will 
move  rapidly  a  little  beyond  the  point  to  which  the 
head  of  the  column  will  extend,  and  place  himself 
correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  markers. 
These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 


i,'.mtdj,^rA'  jjTjt^.. 


76  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  HI. 

I.  On  the  eighth  company,  take  wheeling  distdiice.  2. 
Column  .forward.  3.  Guide  left.  4.  March  for 
double  quick — MARCH.] 

334.  At  the  third  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  outside  of  the  directing  flank: 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  caution  it  to 
stand  fast. 

3:?5.  At  the  command  rharch,  repeated  by  all  the 
captains,  except  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company, 
this  hitter  company  will  stand  fast;  its  chief  will 
align  it  by  the  left  oh  the  first  marker,  who  is  oppo- 
site to  this  company,  and  place  himself  before  its 
centre,  after  commanding:  Front.  At  this  com- 
mand, the  marker  will  retire,  and  the  left  guide  will 
take  his  place. 

336.  All  the  other  companies  will  p*ut  themselves 
in  march,  the  ^ide  of  the  leading  one  djn-cting  him- 
self a  little  within  the  right  general  guide ;  when  the 
seventh  company  has  arrived  opposite  the  second 
marker,  its  captain  will  halt,  and  align  it  on  this 
marker,  in  the  manner  prescribed  for  the  eighth  com- 
pany. 

337.  When  the  captain  of  the  sixth  company  shall 
see  that  there  is,  between  his  company  and  the 
seventh,  the  necessary  space  for  wheeling  into  line, 
he  will  halt  his  company,  the  giiide  facing  to  the 
rear  will  place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction, 
and  the  moment  he  shall  be  assured  in  his  position, 
the  captain  will  align  the  company  by  the  left,  and 
theiv place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre;  the 
other    companies    will    successively    conform  them. 


J 

^      • 

r«lii»a5;ili!!Hr. 

• 

■       t      -      . 

1 

A, 

^ 

-^1 

MM^ym-^ 

i 
■i 

d 

b 

■| 

^fMEI^^Sm, 

• 
1 

^ 

t 

A 

1 

^ 

• 

• 

- 

■' 

a'i!^a^tf\aia:r- 


^  K 


A  h 


cj 

L, 

U 

• 

-' 

u 

•       h 

.J    ' 

.■i 

1, 

^ 

d — 

fc 

^  i 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.     77 

selves  to  what  has  just  been  prescribe'd  for  the  sixth 
company. 

338.  The  colonel  will  follow.the  movement,  and  see 
that  each  company  halts  at  the  prescribed  distance  ; 
lie  will  promptly  remedy  any  fault  that  may  be  com- 
mitted, and  as  soon  as  all  the  companies  shall  be  align- 
ed, he  will  cause  the  guides,  who  are  faced  to  the 
rear,  to  face  about. 

339.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  successively  as- 
sure the  left  guides  on  the  direction,  placing  himself 
in  their  rear,  as  they  arrive. 

340.  The  major  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  and  will  direct  the  march  of  the  leading 
guide. 

3d.   To  take  distances  on  the  head  of  the  column. 

341.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  take  distances  on~the 
leading  company,  will  establish  two  markers  in  the 
manner  juet  prescribed,  one  abreast  with  this  com- 
pany, and  the  other  at  company  distance  in  rear  of  the 
first,  but  both  facing  to  the  front ;  the  left  general 
guide,  on  an  intimation  from  the  lieutenant  c<»lonel, 
will  move  rapidly  to  the  rear  and  place  himself  cor- 
rectly vn  the  prolongation  of  the  two  markers,  a  lit- 
tle beyond  the  point  to  which  the  rear  of  the  column 
will  extend:  these  dispositions  being  made,  the  colo- 
nel will  command  : 


On  the  first  company,  take  whcelinor  distance.  2. 
Battalion,  about  FACE.  3.  Column  forward.  4. 
Guide  right.  5.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 


78  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IIL 

342.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  eompaoies, 
except  the  one  designated,  will  face  abont,  the 
guides  remaining  in  the  front  aiuk,  now  become  the 
rear. 

343.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  outside  of  their  guides. 

344.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  de- 
signated company  will  align  it.  as  prescribed,  No.  335, 
on  the  marker  placed  by  its  side. 

345.  The  remaining  companies  wmII  put  themselves 
in  march,  the  guide  of  the  rearmost  one  will  direct 
himself  a  little  within  the  left  general  guide  ;  when 
the  second  company  shall  have  arrived  ojsposite  .the 
second  marker,  its  captain  will  face  it  about,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  270,  and  align  it, 
as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  first  company. 

346.  The  instant  that  the  tbird  compary  shall  have 
its  wheeling  distance,  its  captain  will  halt  it  facing  it 
about,  as  prescribed.  No.  270,  and  align  it  by  the  left ; 
the  captains  of  the  remaining  companies  will  each,  in 
succession,  conform  himself  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  .captain  of  the  third. 

347  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  as  in- 
dicated No.  338;  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  major 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos. 
339  and  340. 

348.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  in  a  column  with  the 
left  in  front.  . 

349.  They  will  be  executed  in  like  manner  in  a 
column  closed  in  muss ;  but,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  the 


_2£_ 


/'^-, 


°<^ 


c^ 


^1 

^1 


Hr,milfflllllllWffl'!iHllliilllf!l'g 

r^:iiiiiiiyiiiiihiiiiiw"ii'iiiiiiiaii 


mt 


smsMBMmm 

r^|iH!l!ll!i;iUr!:i:i!mffii«! 


,  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.  79 

colonel  to  open  out  the  column  to  half,  instead  of 
full  distance,  he  will  substitute  in  the  commands, 
the  indication  half,  for  that  of  wheeling  distance. 

350.  In  a  column  by  division,  distances  will  be  taken 
according  to  the  same  principles. 

^  Article  Tenth. 

Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full    or  half  distance. 

351.  In  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance,  the  coun- 
termarch will  be  executed  by  the  means  indicated, 
school  of  the  company;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Countermarch.  2.  Battalion  right  for  left) — Face. 
3.  By  file  left  (or  right.)  4.  March  (or  double 
quick — March.  ) 

To  countermarch  a  column  closed  in  mass. 

352.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the  counter- 
march will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means 
subjoined. 

353.  The  column  being  supposed  formed  by  a  divi- 
sion, right  in  front,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Countermarch,  2.  Battalion  right  and  left — FACE. 
3,  By  file  left  and  right.  4.  MARCH  (or  double 
quick — March  ) 


80  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  HL. 

354  At  the  first  command  the  chiefs  of  the  odd 
.numbered  divisions  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the 
right,  aud  the  chiefs  of  the  others  to  i\ice  to  the- 
left. 

355.  At  the  second. command,  the  odd  divisions  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  the  even  to  the  left  ;  the  right 
and  left  guides  of  all  the  divisions  will  face  about ; " 
the  chiefs  of  odd  divisions  will  hasten  to  their  right 
and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  each  chief 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  leading  front  rank 
man  of  his  division  ;  the  chiefs  of  even  divisions  will 
hasten  to  their  left,  and  cause  two  files  to  break  to 
the  rear,  and  each  chief  place  himself  on  the  right  of 
his  leading  front  rank  man. 

356.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  divisions,  each 
conducted  by  its  chief,  will  step  off  snmrtly,  the 
guides  standing  fast ;  each  odd  division  will  wheel  by 
file  to  the  left  around  its  right  guide ;  each  even  divi- 
sion will  wheel  by  file  to  the  right  around  its  left 
guide,  each  division  so  directing  its  march  as  to  arrive 
behind  its  opposite  guide,  and  when  its  head  shall  be 
up  with  this  guide,  the  chief  will  halt  the  division, 
and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front. 

357.  Each  division,  on  fjicing  to  the  front,  will  be 
aligned  by  its  chief  by  the  right  ;  to  this  end,  the 
chiefs  of  the  even  divisions  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
right  of  their  respective  divisions. 

358.  The  divisions  being  aligned,  each  chief  will 
command,  Front;  at  this,  the  guides  will  shift  to 
their  proper  flanks. 

359.  In   a   column  with   left   in   front,  the    conn- 


^/ 


rF- 


z* 


4 


./^^=? 


S(JH'H)L  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.  81 

tcnnarc-h  will  be  executed  hv  the  same  commands 
and  means ;  but  all  the  divisi(»ns  will  be  aligned  by 
the  left ;  to  this  <  nd,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  divisions 
will  hasten  to  the  left  of  their  respective  divisions  as 
soon  as  the  latter  shall  have  been  faced  to  the  front. 

300.  Tte  colonel,  placed  on  the  directing  flank, 
will  superintend  the  general  movement. 

361.  The  countermarch  being  ended,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  will  always  place  himself  abreast  with 
the  leading,  and  the  major  abreast  with  the  rearmost 
division. 

362.  In  a  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  the 
countermarch  will  be  executed  by  the  same  means 
and  commands,  applying  to  companies  what  is  pre- 
scribed for  divisions. 

363.  The  countermarch  will  always  take  place 
from  a  halt,  w-hether  the  column  be  closed  in  mass, 
or  at  full,  or  half  distance. 

Article  Eleventh. 

Being   in  column    by    company,    closed    in    ynass,  to 
form  divisions. 

364.  The  column  being  closed  in  mass,  right  in 
front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  th;^  colonel  shall  w^ish  to 
form  divisions,  he  wiH  command  : 

].  Form    divisions.     2.  Left    companies,    left — Face. 

3.  March  (or  double  quick— Maiwii.) 
6* 


82  frCTIOOI-  OF  THE  IJA'ITAI, ION-PART  III 

365.  At  t])e  first  coinnKiiici,  the  captains  of  the  left 
companies  will  caution  them  to  iace.to  the  left. 

366.  ,At  the  ! second  commnnd,  the  left  c(!ii!p:niies 
will  fiice  to  tlie'  left,  Mnd  their  captains  will  place 
theniselvcB  by  iho  side  ef  their  respective  left  guides. 

367.  The  right  companies,  and  their*  captains,  will 
.-taodfast,  but  the  right  ajid  left  guides  of  each  of 
these  coaipauies  will  piace  themselves  respectively^ 
before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  company,  both 
guides  facing  to  the  right,  and  each  resting  liis  right 
arm  gently  against  the  breast  of  the  front  rank  man 
of  the  "file,  in  order  to  mark  the  direction. 

36S.  At  the  couiiaai!-;]  march,  the  left  companies 
only  will,  put  themselves  in  march,  tlieir  captains 
standing  fist ;  as  each  shall  see  that  his  company, 
filing  \)-dHt,  has  nearly  cleared  the  column,  he  will 
comuuiud : 

.1.  Such  cowpany.     2.  HALT.     3,  FRONT. 

369.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
company  shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  march  ;  the 
second  at  the  instant  it  shall  have  cleared  its  right 
company,  and  the  third  immediately  after  the  second. 

370.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  front,*  the 
files,  if  there  be  intervals  between  Ihem,  will 
promptly  incline  to  th^  right ;  the  captain  will  place 
himself  on  tlie  left  of  the  right  company  of  the  divi- 
sion, iind  ajign  himself  pprr^ectly  o;ithe  frout  rank  of 
that  company. 


SCilOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— I'ART  III.  83 

371.  The  left  guide  will  nlace  himself  at  the  same 
time  l»etuie  (sue  of  tiie  three  left  files  df  his  company, 
Jace  to  the  ri;,'ht,  aiul  ci)ver  coirectly  the  guides  of 
the  risiht  company;  the  moment  his  eaptaio  sees  him 
established  on  the  direction,  he  will  command  : 


Right— Dress. 

'372  At  this,  Jjhe  left  company  will  dresi  forward 
rn  the  alignment  of  the  right  Company  ; -the  front 
rank  man,  who  may  find  himself  opposite  to  the  left 
guide,  will,  without  preceding  his  rank,  rest  lightly 
t;is  breast  against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide.:  the 
captain  of  th^e  left  company  will  direct  its  alignment 
on  this  man,  and  tlie  alignment  being  assured,  he  w-ill 
command,  Front;  but  not  quit  his  position. 

378.  The  cjolonel  seeing  the  divisions  formed,  will 
conunand :     ■      -  . 

Guides— FosTii. 

374.  At  this,  the  guides  who  have  marked  the 
fronts  of  divisions  will  return  to  tbeir  places  in  col- 
umn, the  left  guide  of  each  right  company  passing 
through  the  interval  in  the  centre  of  the  division,  and 
the  captains  vrtll  place  themselves  as  prescribed  No. 
75. 

375.  The  colonel,  from  the  directing  flank  of  the 
column,  will  superintend  the  geiieral  executhjii  of  the 
movement;  •  ■    :•  i  ■ 


370.  If  the   column  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a 


84  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  HI. 

halt,  when  the  coloucl  shiill  wish  to  form  divisions,  he 
will  coinuiand  : 

J.  Form    divisions.     2.    Left  companies,    by  the   left 
flank.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March. 

377.  At  tlie^  first  command,  the  captains  of  the 
right  companies  will  command,  Mark  time,  the  cap- 
tains of  the  left  companies  will  caution  their  compa- 
nies to  face  by  the  left  flank. 

378.  At  the  third  command,  the  right  companies^ 
will  mark  time,  the  left  companies  v/ill  face  to  the 
left  ;  the  captains  of  the  left  companies  will  each  see 
his  company  file  past  him,  and  when  it  has  cleared 
the  column,  will  command  : 

Such  company  by  the  right  flank — March. 

As  soon  as  the  divisions  are  formed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

4.  Forward.    5.  March. 

379.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  column  will  resume 
the  gait  at  which  it  was  marching  previous  to  the 
commencement  of  the  movement.  The  guides  of 
each  division  will  remain  on  the  right  and  left  of  their 
respective  companies  ;  the  left  guide  of  the  right 
company  will  pass  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  before 
the  two  companies  are  united  ;  the  right  guide  of  the 
left  company  will  step  in  the  rear  rank.  The  cap- 
tains will  place  themselves  as  prescribed  No.  75. 


df 

^  \ 

\ 

■ — p — 

R 

r 

^"■^!^mmmmm»-    " 

' 

=»^,i!«:i\!HaiiMf,\im™i5P    '■  -  -  - 

■  i- 

- 

S 

■ 

: 

-^ 

^ 

f— 

, 

4;i!!'!!l!!ltlillillWliiBililllll!lll!M'-      " 

r 

n 

■w 

Y 

'i 

r 

n 

J 

^r 

1 

H 

_h^ 

i 

r  ' 

SCHO  'L  OF  THE  BATTALION—PART  lU.  83 

Being    in    column    at  full    or  half  distance  to  form 
divisions. 

330.  If  tho  column  be  at  a  halt,  and,  instead  of 
beinff  closed  in  mass,  .is  at  full  or  half  distance,  divi- 
sions will  be  formed  in  the  same  manner  ;  but  the 
captaius  of  the  left  companies,  if  the  movement  be 
made  in  quick  timo,  after  commanding  Fi«ONT,  will 
each  place  himself  before  the  cetitro  of  bis  company, 
and  command.  1.  Such  company  forward.  2.  Guide 
right.  3.  March.  If  the  movement  be  made  in 
double  quick  time,  each  will  coiumand  as  soon  as  his 
company  has  cleared  the  column  : 

1.  Such  company  by  the  right  flank.     2.  March. 

381.  The  right  guide  of  each  company  will  so 
direct  his  march  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  right  company.  The  left  company 
being  nearly  up  with  the  rear  rank  of  the  right  c(un- 
pany,  its  captain  will  halt  it,  and  the  movement  will 
be  fiuished  as  prescribed  No.  371  and  following. 

382.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  movement  will  be 
executed  by  inverse  means;  the  right  companies  will 
conft)rm  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  above  for 
the  left  companies  ;  and  the  two  guides,  placed  re- 
spectively, before  the  right  and  lelt  files  of  each  left 
company,  will  face  to  the  left.  At  the  command, 
Guides  posts,  given  by  the  colonel,  the  girides,  who 
have  mai-ked  the  front  of  divisions,  and  th  ^captains, 
will  quickly  retake  their  places  in  the  column. 

383.  If  the  column  be  marching  at  full  distance, 
the  divisions  will  be  formed  as  prescribed  No.  11)6. 
If  it  be  marching  at  half  distance,  the  formation  will 


«f>  8CHO0I.  OF  THE  EATTAL.lUN— P.UJT  lil. 

take  place  by  the  coinmands,  .'tnd  acconliiig  to  the 
principles  iiidiciited  No.  ^76  ;  if  the  column  bo  march- 
iuj/  in  dduJjle  quick  time,  the  companies  which  should 
mark  time  will  march  in  quick  time  by  tLe  coi-imands 
of  their  captains.  '   * 

Rcurarhs  on  the  formation  of  divisious  from  a  halt. 

3c4.  As.thie  moveniont  may  be  cousidertd  as  the 
element  of  deployment-;,  it  ought  to  he  executed  with 
the  utmost  accuracy.  ,^ 

.  385.  If  companies  mi'.rching  by  the  flank  ^lo  not 
preserve  exactly  their  distances,  there  will  be  open- 
ings between  the  files  at  the  instauW)f  facing  to  the 
front. 

38G.  If  captains  halt  their  companies  too  early, 
they  will  want  space,  and  the  files  which  have  not 
cleaied  the  flanks  of  the  standing  ce-mpanies  \\ ill  not 
be  abbvto  dress  into  line  without  pushing  their  ranks 
laterally. 

387.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  companies  be  hrjlted 
too  late,  it  will  be  neces^jary  for  them  to  incline  to 
the  right  or  left  in  dressing ;  and  in  deployments, 
either  of  these  faults  would  lend  to  error  in  the  fol- 
lowing C(uiipauies. 

388.  As  often  as  a  guide  shall  have  to  step  out  to 
place  himself  before  his  subdivision  in  ordei-  to  mark 
the  direction,  he  v>ill  be  particularly  carefnl  to  place 
himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  rhree  outer 
files  of  the  subdivisicm  when  they  shall  be  aligned:  if 
ho  t:ike  too  much  distance,  and  neither  of  thoi^e  files 
finds  itself  against  him,  the  chi<'fs  of  the  sul-division 
will  have  no  a-s-iived  ]>niur  on  whicli  r<>  dii'e<'!- the 
alignment. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  J^ATTALI   N— PART  IV.  87 

PART   FOURTH. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in  column  to 
the  order  in  battle. 

AliTICl.E  FiRST. 

Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle. 

38';).  The  lino  of  battle  may  bo  marked  or  deter- 
mined in  three  ditFereilt  manners  :  1st,  by  placing 
two  markers  ei<j;hty  or  a  hundred  paces  ui'aU:,  on  the 
direction  it  is  wished  to  give  to  the  line  ;  2d,  by 
pla-cing  a  marker  at  the  point  at  which  it  may  be  in- 
tended to  rest  a  flunk,  and  then  chousing  a  secoL-d 
point  towards,  or  beyond  the  opposite  flunk,  and 
there  posting  a  Sr_'cond  marker  distant  from  each 
other  a  little  less  thnn  the  leading  subdivision  ;  'M, 
by  choosing  at  first  the  points  of  dfrection  for  the 
flanks,  and  then  determining,  by  intermediate  points, 
the  stra  ght  line  between  those  seU-cted  points,  both 
of  which  m. ay  sometimes  be  beyond  reach. 

Article  Second. 

Difif  rr at  i:n);les  of  passing  from    cpliimn   at  full   dis- 
tance into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)  ^ 

2.  On  the  right  (or  left)  i  •   ,    ,.         ,  ,    ,., 

3    Forward,^      ^  ^  Mnto  Imeol  battle. 

4.  Faced  to  tlie  rear,       J 


?8  SCPIOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

1st.   Column  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  to  the  left 
into  line  of  battle. 

390.  A  column,  right  in  front,  being  at  a  halt,  when 
the  coh)nel  sh.-ill  \\U\i  to  form  it  to  the  left  into  line, 
he  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides  by  the 
means  previously  indicated,  and  then  command: 

1.  Left  into' line,  ichcel.     2.  March  for  douhlc  quick 

March.) 

391.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  of  the 
leading  company  will  hasten  to  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  left  guides  of  the  column,  face  to 
them,  ;uid  place  himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of 
the  three  right  files  of  his  company,  when  they  shall 
be  in  line  :  he  will  be  assured  in  this  position  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel. 

392.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  left  front  rnnk  man  of  each  com- 
pany will  face  to  the  left,  and  rest  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  right  arm  of  his  guide  ;  the  companies 
will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle  of  wheeling 
from  a  halt,  conforming  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, school  of  the  cc^jnpany.  No.  239  :  each  cap- 
tain will  turn  to  his  company,  to  observe  the  execu- 
tion of  the  movement,  and  when  the  right  of  the 
company  shall  arrive  at  three  paces  fr*  m  the  line  of 
battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Such  company.     2.  HALT. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.    89 

393.  Tlie  company  being  halted,  the  captain  will 
place  himself  on  the  lino  by  the  side  of  the  left  front 
rank  man  of  the  company  next  on  the  rights  align 
himself  correctly  and  command  : 

3.  Right— J) RF.SS. . 

394.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  dress  up 
between  the  captain  and  the  front  rank  man  on  its 
left,  the  captain  directing  the  a'ignment  on  that  man  ; 
the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  right  company, 
who  finds  hiiuself  opposite  to  its  right  guide,  will 
lightly  rest  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  this 
guide. 

395.  Each  captain,  having  aligned  his  company, 
will  command,  Front,  and  ihe  colonel  will  add : 

Guides^FosTH. 

396.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  return  to 
their  places  in  line  of  battle,  each  passing  through 
the  nearest  captnin's  interval  ;  to  permit  iiim  to  pass, 
the  captain  will  momentarily  step  before  the  first 
file  of  his  company,  and  the  covering  sergeant  behind 
the  same  file.  This  rule  is  general  for  all  the  forma- 
tions into  line  of  battle. 

397.  When  companies  form  line  of  battle,  file 
closers  will  always  place  themselves  exactly  two 
paces  from  the  rear  rank,  which  will  sufficiently  as- 
sure their  alignment. 

398.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  the 
colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  and  major,  as  well  as  the 
adjutant  and  sergeant  major,  will  return  to  their  re- 
spective places  in  line  of  battle.     This  rule  is  general 


90     SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  IV. 

for  all  the  formations  into  line  of  battle  ;  ueTerlheless, 
the  battaiiou  beiiiii  in  the  school  of  the  elouieiitary 
instruction,  the  colonel  will  gtt  to  any  pcsiat  he  may 
deem  necessary. 

399.  A  cohunn  with  left  in  front,  will  form  it 
self  to  the  ri^hl'  into  line  of  battle,  acconlinc  to  the 
same  principles  ;  tlie  left  guide  of  tlie  h'ft  conjpany 
will  place  himself,  at  the  first  command,  on  thv  direc- 
tion of  the  right  guides,  in  a  manner  corresponding  to 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  391,  for  the  right  guide  of 
the  right  company. 

400.  At  the  command  guides  posts,  the  captains 
will  take  their  phices  in  line  of  battle  as  well  as  the 
guides.*  This  rule  is  general  for  all  form  at  ions- into 
line  of  battle  in  which  the  companies  are  aligned  by 
the  left. 

401.  A  column  by  division  may  form  itself  into  line 
of  battle  by  the  same  couunands,  and  means,  but 
observing  what  follows  ;  if  the  right  be  in  front,  at 
the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chiefs  of  division,  the 
left  guide  of  each  right  company  will  place  himself 
on  the  alignment  opposite  to  one  of  the  thtee  files  ou 

.  the  left  of  liifl  company  ;  the  left  guide  of  the  first 
company  will  bo  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  ;  the  left  guides  of  the  other  right 
companies  will  align  themselves  correctly  on  the  di- 
visi(u», guides ;  to  this  end,  the  divii^ion  guides  {on  the 
alignment)  will  nivert,  and  hold  their  pieces  up  per- 
pendicularly before  the  centre  of  their  bodies,  at  the 
comm.ind  left  into  line,  tcheel.  If  the  column  by  divi- 
sion be  with  the  left  in  front,  the  light  guides  of 
left  compani«^s  will  conform  thems<dves  to  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  -for  the  left  guides  of  i-ighfc  com- 


'  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  iV.     01 

panics,  and  place  theniselves  on  the  line  opposite  to 
one  of  the  three  right  files  of  their  reppective  com- 
panies. 

402.  A  column  in  march  will  be  fornsed  into  line, 
withciut  haltiuj?,  by  the  same  commands  and  means. 
At  the  command  march,  the  guides  will  halt  in  their 
places,  and  the  lieutrnaut-colonel  will  promptly  rec- 
tify their  positions. 

403.  If,  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  the  cplonel 
should  wish  to  ni<»ve  forward,  without  h;ilting,  he  will 
command: 

1.  By  companies   left   wheel.      2.  March  (or  double, 
quick — March.) 

404.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  left  on 
a  fixed  pivot,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany, No.  '261 ;  the  left  guides  will  step  back  Into  the 
rank  of  file  closers  before  the  wheel  is  completed, 
and  when  the  right  of  the  companies  shall  airive  near 
the  line,  the  colouel  will  command  : 

3.  Fonrard.      4.  March.      5.   Guide  ce.vtre 

405..  At  the  f 'u.rth  command,  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  completed,'  the  companies  will  maix'h  di- 
rectly to  the  front.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  color 
and  the  general  guides  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  to 
the  front.  The  ccdonel  will  assure  the  direction  of 
the  color,  the  captains  of  companies'  and  the  men 
will,  at  once,  conform  theuiselves  to  the  principles  of 
the  march  In  line  of  battle,  to  be  hereinafter  indi- 
c;ited,  No.  587,  and  tbllowing. 


92     SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

406.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  col- 
umn left  in  front. 

By  inversion  to  the  Tight   (or  left)  into  Unc  of  battle. 

407.  When  a  column,  right  in  front,  shall  be  under 
the  necessity  of  forming  itself  into  line  faced  to  the 
reverse  flank,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  execute 
this  .formation  by  the  shortest  movement,  he  will 
command : 

1.  By  inversion,  right  into  line,  tchccl.     2.  Battalion, 

guide  rigid. 

408.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  place  himself  in  front,  and  facing  to  the  right 
guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  ;  at  the  second  com- 
mand, he  will  rectify,  as  pnmiptly  as  possible,  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides  of  the  c(»hunn ;  the 
captain  of  the  odd  company,  if  there"  be  one,  and  the 
column  be  by  division,  will  promptly  bring  the  right 
of  his  company  on  the  direction,  and  at  compaany  dis- 
tance from  the  division  next  in  front;  the  left  guide 
of  the  leading  su])division  will  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides,  and  will  be  assui'ed  in 
his  position  by  the  lieuteiuint  colonel ;  which  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  March  (or  douhle  quick — March.) 

409.  At  this,  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each  sub- 
division will  fa  e  to  the  right,  rest  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  left  arm  of  his  guide,  and  the  battalion 


SCHOOL  OP  Tllii  BATTALION— PART  IV.  93 

will  form  itself  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed;  which  being  exe- 
cuted, the  colonel  will  comniaud  : 


Guides — Posts. 

410.  If  the  column  be  with  the  left  in  front,  it  will 
form  itself,  by  inversion,  to  the  left  into  line,  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles.    • 

411.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion,  when 
formed  into  line  of  battle,  to  bo  moved  forward,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  by  the  commands,  and 
according  to  the  principles  indicated  in  No.  4U3;  al 
ways  preceding  the  connnand,  by  companies  right  (or 
left)  wheet,  by  the  command,  by  inversion. 


Successive  formations. 

412.  Under  the  denomination  of  successive  forma- 
tions are  included  all  those  formations  where  the 
several  subdivisions  of  a  column  arrive  one  after  an- 
other on  the  line  of  battle  ;  such  are  foruKitions  on 
the  right,  or  left,  forward  and  faced  to  the  rear  into 
line  of  battle,  as  well  as  deployments  of  columns  in 
mass. 


413.  The  successive  formations  w-hieh  may  be  or- 
dered when  the  ccdumn  is  marching,  and  is  to  con- 
;thme  marching,  will  be  executed  by  a  combination  of 
the  two  gaits,  quick  and  double  quick  time. 


94  SCIIOOL  OF  TUE  BryrTALiON— PVliT  IV. 

J 

2.  Column  at  fidl  disi§ncc,  on    thr,    right    (or  on  the  \\\ 
left),  into  line  of  battle. 

414.  A  coluinji  by  coinpaiiy,  at  full  distance  aud 
right  in  fVoiU,  liaving  to  form  itself  on  the  right  into 
line  of  b.itile,  theculiniel  will  indicate  to  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel  a  little  in  advance,  the  point  of  appiii,  or 
rest,  for  the  .right,  as  well  as  the  point^»f  direction  to 
the  left;  the  Heutenant  colonel  v\ill  histfta  with  two\ 
!nark(M-s,  and  establish  tbem  in  the  following  manner-' 
(ta  the  direction  indicated. 

415.  The  first  marker  wiii  ■■:,■■:  j*,  ^^  ,l  ,..  l:.v:  poiui;  , 
i'i  appwi  for  the  right  front  rank  man  of  the  leading 
company ;  the  second  will  indicate  the  point  where 
one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  same  company  will 
vest  when  in  line ;  they  will  be  placed  so  as  to  pre- 
sent the  right  shoulder  to  the  battalion  whiMi  formed; 

41G.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command: 

1.   On  the  right,  into  line.     2.  Battalion,  guide  right. 

417.  At  the  second  coinraanj^  the  jight  will  be- 
come the  directing  flank,  and  the  touch  of  the  elbow 
will  be  to  that  side ;  the  right  guide  of  the  leading 
company  will  march  straight  forward  until  np  with 
the  turning  poiiit,  and  each  following  guide  will 
march  in  the  trace  •)f  the  one  immediately  preceding. 

41-*.  The  le^iding  company  being  n'enrly  up  with 
the  first  marker,  its  captain  \A-ill  command:  3.  Right 
turn,  and  When  the  company  is  precisely  up  wnth  this 
marker,  he  will  add:  2.  MARCft. 


^£_ 


4a. 


i 


JIPBIlik 


^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.    .        95 

419.  At  the  command"  warcA,  the  company  will 
turn  tit  the  right;  tlie  right  guide  will  so  dtl-ect  him- 
self as  to  b.ring  the  man  next  to  him  opposite  to  the 
right  marker,  and  when  at  three  paces  from  him,  the 
captain  will  command: 

1.  First  company.     2.  Halt. 

420.  At  the'secoBd  coTniBai!.-!,  thp  company  will 
.   !t;    the  files,  not  yet-  in  line,  will  I'riini  promptly 

the  left  guide  will  retire  as  a  file  closer  ;  and  the  cap- 
tain will  then  command  : 

3    /?iV/.'i— DilESy. 

4-21.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  align  it- 
self; the'  two  men  who  find  themselves  opposite  to 
the  two  markers,  wnll  each  lightly  rest  his  breast 
against  the  right  arm  of  his  marker ;  the  eapt.iiD  pass- 
ing to  the  right  of  the  front  rank,  will  direct  the  a  liga- 
ment on  these  two  men.  These  rules  are  general  for 
all  successive  formations. 

4-22.  The  second  company  will  contin;;.  ,  w,,,rch 
straight  forward  ;  when  arrived  (ipposite  to  tlie  left 
flank  of  the  precedi;-g  company,  it  will  turn  to  the 
right,  and  be  formed  on  the  line  of  battle,  as  has  just 
been  prescribed;  the  right  guide  will  direct  himself 
so  as  to  come  upon  that  line  by  the  siL'  if  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the.  first  company. 

4'23.  At  tlie  distance  of  three  paces  f/  om  the  lin« 
of  battle,  the  C(»mpany  will  be  halted  by  its  captain, 
who  will  phice  himself  briskly  by  the  side  of  the  man. 


96  SCHOOL  CF  THE  BATTALION-PART  IV. 

on  the  left  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align   hiin- 
self  correctly  on  its  i'vont  rank. 

424.  The  left  guide  will,  at  the  same  time,  place 
himselt  before  one  of  the  three  left  tiles  of  his  com- 
pany, and  facing  to  the  right  he  will  place  himself 
accurately  on  the  direction  of  the  two  markers  of 
the  preceding  company. 

425.  The  captain  will  then  coiymand  : 

Right—  Dress. 

426.  At  this  command,  the  second  company  will 
dress  forward  on  the  line  ;  the  captain  will  direct  its 
alignment  on  the  front  rank  man  who  has  rested  his 
breast  against  the  left  guide  ot  the  company. 

427.  The  following  companies  will  thus  come  suc- 
cessively to  form  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle, 
each  conforming  itself  to  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  one  next- to  the  right ;  and  when  they 
shall  all  be  established,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides— FOSTS. 

428.  At  this  command  the  guides  will  take  their 
places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  placed  be- 
fore the  right  company  will  retire. 

429.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and 
the  colonel  should,  wish  to  cause  the  movement  to  be 
executed  in  double  quick  time,  he  will  add  the  com- 
mand :  Double  quick — Maruii.  At  the  command 
march,  all  the  companies  will  take  the  double  quick 


BCflObL  OF'TTIE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  97 

step,  ami  tho  movf^iner.t  will  be  executed  as  prescrib- 
ed, No.  417,  and  folluwing. 

430.  Tlie  colonel  will  fidiowup  the  fornuntion,  pass- 
ing along  in  front,  and  being  always  opposite'  to  the 
company  about  to  turn  ;  it  is  thus  that  he  will  be  the 
better  able  to  see  and  to  correct  the  error  that  would 
result  from  a  command  given  too  soon  or  too  late  to 
the  preceding  company. 

431.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will,  with  the  greatest 
care,  assiire  the  direction  of  the  guides;  to  this  end, 
the  instant  that  the  markers  are  established  for  the 
leading  company,  he  will  move  a  little  beyond  the 
point  at  which  the  left  of  the  next  company  will 
rest,  establish  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  two  markers,  and  assure  the  guide  of  the  se- 
cond company  t>n  this  direction ;  this  guide  being  as- 
sured, the  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  far- 
ther to  the  rear,  in  order  to  assure  in  like  manner, 
the  guide  of  the  third  company,  and  so  on  succes- 
eively,  to  the  left  of  the  battalion.  In  assuring  the 
guides  of  their  positions  on  the  line  of  battle,  he  will 
take  care  to  let  them  first  place  themselves,  and  con- 
fine himself  to  rectifying  their  positions,  if  they  do 
not  cover  accurately,  and  at  the  proper  distance,  the 
preceding  guides  or  markers.  This  rule  is  general 
for  all  successive  formations. 

432.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  on  the 
left  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples ;  the  captains  will  go  to  the  left  of  their  respective 
companies  to  align  them,  and  shift  afterwards  to  their 
proper  flanks,  as  prescribed,  No.  400. 

7^ 


98  SCHOOL    'F  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  on  the  right,  or  left^  into  line 
of  battle. 

433.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  executed 
with  reguh«-ity,  it  is  necessary  to  establish  the  line  of 
battle  so  that  the  guide  of  each  company,  after  turn- 
ing, may  haye  at  least  ten  steps  tti  take,  in  order  to 

come  upon  that  line. 

434.  Ill  the  first  exercises,  the  line  of  battle  will 
be  establi.vhed  on  a  direction  parallel  to  that  (if  the 
column  ;  but  when  the  captains  and  guides  shall  com- 
prehend the  mechanism  of  the  movement,  the  colonel 
will  generally  choose  oblique  directions,  in  order  to 
habituate  the  battalion  to  form  itself  in  any  direc- 
tion. 

435.  When  the  directicm  of  the  line  of  battle  forme 
a  sensible  angle  withthat  of  the  march  of  the  column, 
the  colonel,  before  beginning  the  movement,  will  give 
the  head  of  the  column  a  new  direction  parallel  to 
that  line;  to  this  end,  he  will  indicate  to  the  guide  of 
the  leading  company  a  point  in  advance,  on  which 
this  guide  will  immediately  direct  himself,  and  the 
company  will  conform  itself  to  the  direction  of  its 
guide,  at  the  command,  or  on  a  mere  caution,  of  the 
captain,  according  as  the  change  of  directi(m  may  re- 
quire; each  following  company  will  make  the  same 
movement,  on  the  same  ground,  as  it  shall  successive- 
ly arrive.  By  this  means  the  guides  of  all  the  com- 
panies in  th'e  column  will  have,  after  turning,  nearly 
the  same  number  of  paces  to  lake  ia  order  to  come 
upon  the  hue  of  battle. 

436.  Every  captain  will  always  observe,  in  placing 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  99 

himself  on  tliat  line, -not  to  give  the  command  dress, 
until  after  the  guide  of  his  company  shall  have  been 
assured  on  the  directi<)n  by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 
This  rule  is  general  for  all  successive  formations. 

437.  'Each  captain  ^^^ll  cause  his  compwiy  to  sup- 
port arms,  the  instant  that  the  captain,  who  follows 
him,  shttli  have  commanded /rowf.  This  rule  is  gen- 
eral for  all  successive  formations. 

438.  When  in  the  execution  of  this  movement,  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  c<»inmence  firing,  he  will  give 
the  order  to  that  effect  to  the-captain  whose  compa- 
uy  is  the  first  in  line  of  battle ;  this  captain  will  im- 
mediately place  himself  behind  the  centre  of  his  com- 
pany, and  as  soon  as  the  next  captain  shall  have  com- 
nirtiided  front,  he  will  commence  the  fire  by  file,  by 
the  commands  prescribed,  school  of  the  company. 
At  the  command  Jire  by  file,  the  marker  at  the  outer 
file  ot  this  first  company  will  retire,  and  the  other 
will  place  himself  against  the  nearest  man  of  the 
next  company.  The  captain  of  the  latter  will  com- 
mence firing  as  soon  as  the  captain  of  the  third  com- 
pany, ill  line,  shall  have  couimanded/ron<;  the  mark- 
er before  the  nearest  file  of  the  second  company,  in 
line,  will  now  retire,  and  the  guide  before  the  oppo- 
site flank  will  place  himself  before  the  nearest  file  of 
the  third  company,  in  line,  and  so  on,  in  continuation, 
to  the  last  company  on  the  left  or  right  of  the  battal- 
ion, according  as  the  formation  may  have  commenced 
with  the  right  or  left  in  front. 

439.  In  all  the  successive  formations,  the  same 
principles  will  be  observed  for  the  execution  of  the 
fire  by  file.  This  fire  will  always  be  executed  by  the 
command  of  each  captain  of  company. 


100  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

3d.  Column  at  full  distance,  forward  into  line  of  battle. 

440.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  form  it  forward  into  line,  he  will  conform 
to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415,  aud  then 
command: 

1.  Forward  into  line.    2.  By  company,  left  half  wheel. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

441.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  add  guide  right,  put  the  company 
in  march,  halt  it  three  paces  from  the  markers,  and 
align  it  against  the  latter  by  the  right. 

442.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  other  compa- 
nies will  wheel  to  the  left  on  fixed  pivots ;  and,  at 
the  instant  the  colonel  shall  judge,  according  to  the 
direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  that  the  companies 
have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  command: 

4.  Forward.    5.  Marcil     6.  Guide  right. 

443.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  ceasing 
to  wheel,  will  march  straight  forward,  and  at  the 
sixth,  the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right. 
The  right  guide  of  the  second  company,  who  is  near- 
est to  the  line  of  battle,  will  march  straight  forward; 
each  succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the  file  im- 
mediately before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel. 

444.  The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite 


di^i^feMflkiii^ldiMliiaiilMMid 


-ff^. 


■jmM^mmmmmmMmm&iimmM:M-^ 


Mmt^ 


\ 


4Sl„:-f 


qt;^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.         101 

to  the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will  cau?:e  it  to 
turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach  the  line  of  bat- 
tle; and  when  its  right  guide  shall  be  at  three  paces 
from  that  line,  the  captain. will  command: 


1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt. 


445.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt ;  the  files  not  yet  in  line  with  the  euide  will 
come  into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place  him- 
self oi!  the  line  of  battle,  so  as  to  be  opp<»site  to  one 
of  the  three. files  on  the  left  of  the  company  ;  and  as 
soon  as  he  is  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel,  the  captain,  having  placed  himself  accu- 
rately on  the  line  of  battle,  will  command : 

3    Right— Bmesh. 

446.  At  the  instant  that  the  guide  of  the  second 
company  begins  to  turn  to  the-  right  the  gtiide  of  the 
third,  ceasing  to  follow  the  file  immediately  Iiefore 
him,  will  march  straight  forward;  and,  when  he  shall 
arrive  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  second,  his  captain 
will  cause  the  company  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order 
to  approach  the  line  of  battle,  halt  it  at  three  paccR 
from  that  line,  and  align  it  by  the  right,  as  prescribed 
for  the  second  company. 

447.  Each  following  company  will  execute  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  third,  as  the  4)reced- 
Id^  company  shall  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  ap- 
proach the  lirfe  of  battle. 


102  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

448.  The  formatiou  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — POSTS. 

449.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  ob- 
serve in  this  iortnation,  what  is  prescribed  for  them 
on  the  right  into  line.  , 

450.  A  column  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  for- 
ward into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples and  by  inverse  means. 

4.^1.  When  a  column  b)'  company  at  full  di  tance, 
rijElht  in  front,  and  in  mairh,  shall  arrive  behind  the 
right  of  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  form  into  battle,  the 
colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  coniorni  them- 
selves to  what  IS  prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415. 

452.  The  head  of  the  C(dumn  having  arrived  at 
company  distance  from  the  two  markers  established 
on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Foncard  into  line.     2.  By  company,  left  half  wheel. 
?>.  March  (or  double  quick — March^J 

453.  At  the'first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first 
company  will  .command  Guide  right,  and  caution  it 
to  march  directly  to  the  front,  the  ciiptaius  of  the 
other  companies  will  caution  them  to  wheel  to  the 
left. 

454.  At  the  command  marrh,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  first  company  will  continue  to  march 
to  the  front,  taking  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right. 
Its  chief  will  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the  mark- 
ers, and  align  it  by  the  right.  The  other  companies 
will  wheel  to  the  left  on  fixed  pivots,  and  at  the  in- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.         103 

stant  the. colonel  shall' judge  that  they  have  wheeled 
sufficiently,  he  will  command: 

4.  Forward.     5.  MauciI-    G.   Guiflc  right. 

455.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  will 
cease  to  wheel  ami  move  forward.  At  the  sixtli,  tliey 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  riyht.  The 
movement  will  be  executed  ag  previously  explained. 

456.  If  the  colonel  should  wijsh  to  form  the  column 
forward  into  line,  and  c((ntinue  to  maich  in  this 
order,  he  will  not  cause  markers  to  be  establi^vhed ; 
the  nufvement  will  be  executed  in  double  quick  time, 
by  the,  same  commands  and  means,  but  with  the  fol- 
lowing nu;dificatious. 

457.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first 
coTflpany  will  add  quick  time  atter  the  command  ^uiV/c 
right.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  company 
will  continue  to  march  in  quick  time,  and  wi!l  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right;  its  chief  will  imme- 
diately place  himself  on  its  right,  and  to  ssure  the 
march  will  take  p(»ints  of  direction  to  the  front.  The 
captain  of  (he  second  company  will  cause  his  com- 
pany to  take  the  san)e  gait  as  soon  as  it  shall  arrive 
on  a  line  with  the  first,  and  will  also  move  to  the 
right  (tfjjjis  company;  the  captiiins  of  the  third  and 
f<»urth  ct>mpaiiies  will  execute  successively  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second.  The  companies 
will  pre.«^erve  the  tonch  of  elbows  to  the  right,  until 
the  command  guide  centre. 


458.  AVhen  the  color  company  shall  have  entered 


104  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PAliT  IV. 

the  line,  the  colouel  will  commaud  guide  centre.  At 
tTiis'cunmiand,  the  color-bearer  and  the  righ*-*  general 
guide  will  move  I'iqiidly  six  paces  in  iidvaiice  tjf  the 
line.  The  colonel  will  iibsiue  the  diiection  of  the 
Cdlor-l  earer.  The  liciltpnant  colonel  and  the  right 
companies  will  iiun)ediately  conform  themselves  to 
the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  of  battle.  The 
left  companies  and  tiie  k^ft  general  guide,  as  tbey  ar- 
rive on  the  line,  will  also  conform  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  when  the  last  company  shall  have  arrived  on  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  double  quick  to  be 
resumed. 


459.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  movement  be  en- 
tirely C(»mpleted,  before  halting  the  teattalion.  As 
soon  as  the  part  of  the  battalion  already  formed  shall 
have  arrived  on  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will 
halt  the  battalion  ;  the  companies  not  in  line  wiHeach 
complete  the  movement. 

Remarks  on  the  formaiion  forward,  into  line  of  battle. 


460.  The  precision  of  this  movement  depends  on 
the  direction  the  companies  have  at  the  moment  the 
colonel  commands  Foncard — March.  The^^donel 
will  judge  nicely  the  point  of  time  for  gi^iff^  this 
commaud,  observing  that,  if  the  direction  of  the  line 
of  battle  form  with  that  <»f  the  column  a  right,  or 
nearly  a  right  angle,  the  companies  ought  to  wheel 
about  the  eiglithof  tlie  circle,  and  that  the  mose  accu- 
rate the  angle  formed  by  the  two  directions,  so  much  the 


r=ihL^M;ki.^tkmi^i^tm^mMtlk 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  105 

more  the  Gompanies  ought  to  wheel  before  marching 
straight  forward. 

461  It  is  important  that  each  company  in  march- 
ing towards  the  line  of  battle  should  turn  exactly 
opposite  the  point  where  its  captain  ought  to  place 
himst-'lf  on  that  line;  if  a  company  turn  too  soon,  it 
will  find  itself  masked,  in  part,  by  that  which  pre- 
ceded it  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  be  obliged  to  un- 
mask itself  by.  the  oblique  step;  if  it  turn  too  late, 
it  will  leave  an  interval  between  itself  and  the  pre- 
ceding company  to  be  regained  in  like  manner.  In 
either  ease,  the  next  coni|  any  will  l)e  led  into  error, 
and  the  fault  propagated  to  the  opposite  tlank  of  the 
battalion, 

4^2.  The  guide  of  ea,ch  company  ought  so  to  regu- 
late hin)self  in  turning,  as  to  bring  his  company  to  the 
halting  point  parallelly  with  the  line  of  bajttle. 

463.  If  the  angle  formed  by  the  line  of  battle  and 
the  primitive  direction  of  the  ctdumn  be  so  acute,  that 
the  companies  on  arriving  opposite  to  their  respec- 
tive places  on  the  line  of  battle,  find  themselves  iicarr 
ly  parallel  to  it,  the  captains  will  not  give  tbe  com- 
mand right  (or  left)  turn,  but  each  halt  his  company, 
place  himself  on  the  line,  and  command  : 

Right  {ovJeft) — Dress. 

464.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  angle  formed  by  the 
line  of  battle  and  the  primitive  direction  of  the 
columu  be  much  greater  than  a  right  angle,  the 
formation  should  bo  executed  not  by  the  movement/or- 
ward  into  line  of  battle,  but  by  that  of  on  the  right  (or 


]06         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV 

left)  into  line  of  battle,  and  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  this  formation. 

465  If  a  company  encounter  an  obstacle  Rofficiont 
to  prevent  it  from  marching  by  the  front,  it  \^  ill  right 
(or  left)  fare  in  marching,  by  the  c<»miiiaii(ls  and 
means  indicated  in  tiie  school  of  the  con)pa)iy,  Nnig. 
314  and  315.  The  guide  will  continue  to  follow  the 
same  file  behind  which  he  was  marching,  and  will 
maintain  exactly  the  same  distance  from  the  compa- 
ny immediately  preceding  his  own.  The  obstacle  be- 
ing passed,  the  company  will  be  formed  into  line  by 
the  command  of  its  captain. 

Ath.   Column   at  full  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into 
line  of  battle. 

466.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  form  it  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  he  and  the 
lieutenant  cobniel  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is 
prescribed  N(»s.  414  and  415,  and  the  colonel  will 
then  command: 

1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  right— 
Face.    3.  March  (or  double  quirk — March). 

467.  A.t  the  first  command,  th'^  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  cause  it  to  face  t<»  the  right,  and  put 
it  in  march,  causing  it  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and 
direct  its  march  towards  the  line  of  battle  which  it 
will  pass  in  rear  of  the  left  marker;,  the  fir.'-t  file 
having  passed  three  paces  beyond  the  line,  the  com- 
pany wHl  wheel  again  by  file  to  the   left,  in  order  to 


j^'-?u"»'t  w '  -w-  jii  M'  "'r^r 


left)  in 
pies  pr 

465 
to  prev 
(or  lej 
means 
314  am 
same  1 
raainta 
uy  imu 
iiig  paf 
the  coi 


466. 
right  ■ 
wish  tt 
lieuten 
prescri 
then  C( 

1.  Intc 
Fa( 

467. 
irig  COI 
it  in  m 
direct 
will  p; 
having 
pany  v 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATT.LLION— PART  IV.   •         107 

place  itself  in  rear  of  the  two  markers  ;  being  in 
this  position,  its  captain  will  halt  it,  face  it  to  the 
front,  and  align  it  by  the  right  against  the  markers. 

468.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  other  compa- 
nies will  face  to  the  right,  each  captain  i)lacing  him- 
self by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

460.  At  the  command  march,  the  companies  will 
put  themselves  in  movement ;  the  left  guide  of  the 
second,  who  is  nearest  to  the  line  of  battle,  will  hasten 
in  advance  to  mark  that  line;  he  will  place  himself 
ou  it  as  prescribed  above  for  successive  formations, 
and  thn«  indicate  to  his  captain  the.point  at  which  he 
ought  to  pass  the  line  of  battle,  by  three  p;ices,  in 
order  to  wheel  by  tile  to  the  left,  and  then  to  direct 
his  company  parallelly  to  that  line. 

470.  As  soon  as  the  first  file  of  this  company  shaU 
have  arrived  near  the  left  file  of 'the  preceding  one 
already  on  the  line  of  battle,  its  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Second  company.    2.  Halt,     3.  Front.    4. 
Right — Dress. 

47 J.  The  first  conrmand  will  be  given  when  the 
comp;niy  sh;ill  yet  have  four  paces  to  take  to  reach 
the  halting  point. 

472.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt. 

473.  At  the  third,  the  company  will  face  to  the 
front,  and  if  their  he  openings  between  th*'  files,  the 
latter  will  promptly  tdose  to  the  -right;  the  captain 
will  immediately  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  man 


108  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

on  the  left  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align  hina- 
self  on  its  front  rank. 

474.  The  fourth  couunand  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  426. 

475.  The  following  companies  will  be  conducted 
and  estnblished  on  the  line  of  battle  as  just  prescrib- 
ed for  the  second,  each  regulating  itself  by  the  one 
that  precedes  it ;  the  left  guides  will  detach  them- 
selves in  time  to  precede  their  respective  companies 
on  the  Hue  by  twelve  or  fifteen  paces,  and  ench  place 
himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left 
files  of  his  company,  when  in  line.  If  the  movement 
be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  the  moment  it  is 
commenced,  all  the  left  guides  will  detach  themselves 
at  the  same  time  from  thn  column,  and  will  move  at 
a  run  to  establish  themselves- on  the  line  of  battle. 

476.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  com 
mand : 

Guides— FosTS. 

477.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel,  in  this 
"formation,  will  each  observe  what  is  prescribed  for 
him  in  that  of  on  the  right,  into  line  of  battle. 

478.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  faced 
to  the  rear  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

479.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  should  arrive 
in  front  of  the  right  of  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  form 
into  battle,  the  colonel  and  lieutenant  col.  uel  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  N(»s.  414  and  415. 

480.  When  the  head  of  the  column  shall  be  nearly 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.    109 

at  company,  distance  from  the  two  markers  establish- 
ed on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Into   line,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.-  Battalion,   by  the 
right  flank.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 


481.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  cau- 
tion their  companies  to  face  by  the  right  flunk. 


4^.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains  of  companies,  all  the  companies  will  face 
to  the  right;  the  first  company  will  then  wheel  by  file 
to  the  left,  and  be  directed  by  its  captain  a  little  to 
the  re.tr  of  the  left  marker  ;  then  pass  three  paces 
beyond  the  linej  and  wheel  again  by  file  to  the  left; 
having  arrived  on  the  line,  the  captain  will  halt  the 
company,  and  align  it  by  the  right.  The  remaining 
part  of  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  heretofore 
explained. 


483.  The  foregoing  principles  are  applicable  to  a 
column,  leti  in  front. 


484.  As  the  companies  approach  the  line  of  battle, 
it  is  necessary  that  the  captains  should  so  direct  the 
march  as  to  cross  that  line  a  little  in  rear  of  their  re- 
spective guides,  who  are  faced  to  the  basis  of  the 
formation  ;  hence  each  guide  ought  to  detach  himself 
in  time  to  find  himself  correctly  established  on  the 
direction  before  his  company  shall  come  up  with 
him. 


no         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOxN- PART  IV. 

Article  Third. 

Formation  in  line  of  battle  by  tico  movements. 

485.  If  a  column  by  company,  riji^ht  in  front,  and 
at  a  halt,  find  itself  in  ]);irt  on  tLc  lino  of  b:ittle,  and 
the  colonel  should  think  pioper  to  foriu  line  of  "bat- 
tle before  all  the  companies  enter  the  new  direction, 
the  foi  mation  will  be  executed  in  the  ftillowing  man- 
Dei-. 

486.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  column  has  ar- 
rived behind  the  line  of  battle,  and  that  five  compa- 
uies  have  entered  th<^  new  direction.  The  colonel 
litiving  assured  the  guides  of  the  first  five  companies 
on  the  direction,  will  command : 

1.  Left   into   line,   wheel.     2.   Three   rear  companies, 
foricard  into  line. 

487.  At  the  second  commaiHi,  the  chief  of  each  of 
the  rear  companies  will  command :  By  company,  left 
half  wheel;  and  the  colonel  will  add  : 

3.  March  (or  double  qmick—MxRCU.) 

488.  At  this  command,  britVly  repeated,  the  first 
five  companies  will  form  themselves  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle,  and  the  three  last  foricard,  into  line  of 
battle,  by  the  means  prescribed  for  these  respective 
formations  ;  each  captain  (tf  the  three,  i-ear  companies 
will,  when  his  company  shall  hav«  sufficieutiy  wheel- 
ed, command  : 


SCH  OL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  IV.  Ill 

1.  Forward.    2.  March.     3.  Guide  right. 

489.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
commaud: 

1.   To  the  left,  and  forward  into  line.'    2.  March  (or 
double  quick — MARCH.) 

490.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  those 
conipauie.s  which  have  not  entered  on  the  new  direc- 
tion, will  command  :  By  company,  left  half  trheel. 
At  the  command  march,  bri.-kly  repeated,  the  tirstfive 
conip;Tnics  will  form  left  into  line,  and  the  last  three 
forwaid  into  line,  as  prescribed  for  these  respective 
formati(»ns.  Those  captains  who  form  their  companies 
forward  into  line  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed, 
No.  488. 

49J.  If  the  colonel  should  wi-'h,  in  forming  the  bat- 
talion into  line,  to  march  it  immediately  forward?  he 
will  command : 

1.  By  company  to  the  left,  and  forward  into  line. 
2.  March. 

492.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain,  whose 
company  is  not  yet  in  the  new  direction,  will  com- 
mand :  1.  By  company,  left  half  wheel.  2.  DoiMe 
quick.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  companies  not  in  the  new  direction 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  above  for.  forming 
forward  into  line  while  marching;  each  of  the  other 
companies  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and 


112         SCriOOL  OF  THE  RATTALION-PART  IV 

whon  t"he  right  of  these  companies  shall  arrive  on  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


3.  Forward.     4.  March,     5.   Guide  centre. 

493.  The  fifth  command  will  be  given  when  the 
color-bearer  arrives  on  the  line,  if  not  already  there. 

494.  If  the,  battalion  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  the  colonel  will  cause  quick  time  to  be  taken 
before  commencing  the  movement. 

495.  If,  instead  of  arriving  behind,  the  column 
should  arrive  before  the  line  of  battlCfthecoloiiel  will 
command : 

1.  Left  into  line,  ichcel.     2.    Three  rear  companies  into 
line,  faced  to  the  rear. 

496.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  each 
of  the  three  rear  companies  will  command  :  1.  Such 
company ;  2.  Right — Face.  The  colonel  will  then  add: 

3.  March  for  double  quick — March.) 

497.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first 
five  companies  will  form  themselves  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle,  and  the  three  Vdfit  faced  to  the  rear,  into 
line  of  battle,  by  the  means  prescribed  for  these  re- 
spective formations. 

498.  If  the  column  be  in  marcb,  tlie  colonel  will 
command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.   .     113 
1.   To  the  Irft,  and  into  line  faced  to  the  rear. 
2.  March  (ov  double  quick— "SIarcu.) 

49i).  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
Nos.  39J,  480,  and  following. 

500.  These  several  movements  in  a  colunm,  left  in 
fnmt,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples, and  by  inverse  means. 

Article  Fourth. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  half  dis- 
■    tance,  into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  or  (right)  ^ 

2.  On  the  right  (or  left)  (  •  i.    t        c  i    L^^ 

3.  Forward  by  deployment,  f  ^^^'^  ^"^^  ^^  ^''^^^le. 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear,  J 

1st.   Column    at   half  distance,  to  the  left   (or  right) 
into  line  of  battle. 

501.  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to  form  it- 
self to  the  right  for  left)  into  line  of  battle,  the  co- 
lonel will  cause  it  to  take  distances  by  one  of  the 
means  prescribed.  Article  IX.,  Part  third,  of  this 
school ;  which  being  executed,  he  will  form  the  col- 
umn into  line  of  battle,  as  has  been  indicated,  No.  390, 
and  following. 

502.  If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  distance  be 
in  maorch,  and  it  be  necessary  to  form  rapidly  into  line 
of  battle,  the  colonel  will  command : 


114        f^CIIOOL  OF  THE  HATTALK)N-PART  IV. 
1.  By  the  rear  of  column  left  (or  right)  into  line,  icheel^ 
2.  March  for  double  quick — Mar€h.) 

503.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  jjeneral  fjuide 
will  move  ntpidly  to  the  tr(»nt,  and  phice  himself  a 
little  beyond  the  point  where  the  head  of  the  column 
will  rest,  and  on  the  prolongation  of  the  guides.  The 
capt;iiii  of  tbe  eighth  compjiny  will  eommajid  :  Left 
into  line,  ithccl;  the  other  captains  will  caution  their 
companies  to  continue  to  march  to  the  front. 

504.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company,  tlie  guide  of  this 
company  will  halt  short,  and  the  company  will  wheel 
to  tlie  left,  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed 
for  w4ieeling  from  a  halt ;  when  its  right  shall  arrive 
near  the  line,  the  captain  will  halt  the  company,  and 
align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  captains  will  place 
themselves  briskly  on  the  flank  of  the  column ;  when 
the  captain  of  the  seventh  sees  there  is  sufiicient  dis- 
tance between  his  company  and  the  eighth  to  form 
the  latter  into  line,  he  wuU  command:  Left  into  line, 
wheel — March;  the  lelt  guide  will  halt  short,  and 
facing  to  the  rear,  will  place  himself  on  the  line;  the 
company  will  wheel  to  the  left,  the  man  on  the  left  of 
the  front  rank  will  face  to  the  left,  and  place  his  breast 
against  the  left  arm  of  the  guide ;  the  captain  will 
halt  the  company  when  its  right  shall  arrive  near  the 
Hue,  and  will  align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  compa- 
nies will  conform  successively  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  seventh. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  IV.         115 

505.  E:ich  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  of  his 
company  on  the  left  man  in  the  front  rank  of  the  com- 
p-ciny  next  on  his  right. 

5UG.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  be  watchful  that 
the  leading  guide  marches  accurately  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  line  of  battle,  and  directs  himself  on 
the  right  general  guide.  The  major  placed  in  rear 
of  the  left  guide  of  the  eighth  company,  will,  as  soon 
as  the  guide  of  the  seventh  company  is  established  on 
the  direction,  hasten  in  rear  of  the  guides  of  the  (  ther 
companit's,  so  as  to  assure  each  of  them  in  accession 
on  the  line. 

2.   Column  at  half  distance,  on  the  right  (ox  lift)  into 
line  of  battle. 

507.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  form  itself  on 
the  right  Cor  left)  into  line  of  battle,  as  prescrired  for 
a  column  at  full  distance. 

3rf.  Column   at   half   distance,  forward,  into    'ine  of 
.    battle. 

508.  If  it  be  wished  to  form  a  column  at  half  dis- 
tance, forward  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  first 
cause  it  to  close  in  mass  and  then  deploy  it  on  the 
leading  company. 

Ath.  Column  at  half  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into 

line  of  battle. 

509.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  be  formed  into 
line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  for  a 
column  at  full  distance. 


iig       school  of  the  battalion— part  iv. 
Article   Fifth. 

Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  mass. 

510.  A  column  in  mass  may  be  formed  into  lino  of 
battle: 

i .  llaced  to  the  front,  by  the  deployment. 

/ 
2.  I'aced  to  the,  rear,  by  the  countermarch  and 
4  the  deployment. 

Jf'aced  to  the  right  and  faced  to  the  left,  by  a 
change  of  direction  by  the  flank,  and  the  de- 
ployment. 

511.  tVhen  a  column  in  mass,  by  division,  arrives 
behind  he  line  on  which  it  is  intended  to  deploy  it, 
the  colqiel  will  indicate  in  advance,  to  the  lieutenant 
colonelJthe  direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  as  well  as 
the  poitft  on  which  he  may  wish  to  direct  the  column. 
The  lieiteuant  colonel  will  immediately  detach  him- 
self wim  two  markers,  and  establish  them  on  that 
line,  thi  first  at  the  point  indicated,  the  i^econd  a  little 
less  thap  the  front  of  a  division  from  the  first. 

512.  Deployments  will  always  be  made  upon  lines 
parallel,  and  lines  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle  ; 
consequently,  if  the  head  of  the  column  be  near  the 
line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  commence  by  establish- 
ing the  direction  of  the  column  perpendicularly  to 
that  line,  if  it  be  not  already  so,  by  one  of  the  means 
indicated,  No.  244  and  following,  or  No.  307  and  fol- 
lowing.    If  the  colunm  be  in  march^he  will  so  direct 


f  1 


r 


%h 


\  -I 


1,  ;■ 


.Vg'W 


■'  ^ 


M^: 


M      X'.   H 


'M-  t■-.;•:..«^,>l»■:•■•^    v 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  li- 

lt that  it  may  arrive  exactly  behind  the  markers,  per- 
pendicularly to  the  Hue  of  battle,  and  halt  it  at  three 
paces  from  that  line. 

513.  The  column,  right  in  front,  being  halted,  it  is 
supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to  deploy  it  on  the 
first  division ;  he  will  order  the  left  general  guide  to 
go  to  a  point  on  the  line  of  battle  a  little  beyond  that 
at  which  the  left  of  the'  battalion  will  rest  when  de- 
ployed, and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  markers  established  before  the  fir^st  divi- 
sion. 

514.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.   On  the  first  division,  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion, 
left — Face. 

515.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  di- 
vision will  caution  it  to  stand  fiist ;  the  chiefs  (»f  the 
three  other  divisions  will  remind  them  that  they  will 
have  to  iace  to  the  left. 

516  At  •the  second  command,  the  three  last  divi- 
sions will  face  to  the  left;  the  chief  of  each  division 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  left  guide,  and 
the  junior  captain  by  the  side  of  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company,  who  will  have  stepped  into 
the  front  rank- 

517.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  place  a  third  marker  on  the  alignment  yf  the  two 
first,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  right 
cunip;iny,  first  division,  and  then  place  himself  on  the 
line«of  battle  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at  which 
the  left  of  the  second  division  will  rest. 


118  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BA7  TALION— PART  IV. 

518.  The  colouel  will  then  coinuiaud: 

3.  March  (or  donUc  quick — March.) 

519.  At  this  command,  the    chief  of  the  first  divi- 
sion will  go  to  its  right,  and  command: 

/^i/r/'f— Dress. 


5"20.  At  this,  the  division  will  dress  up  against  the 
markers  ;  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  its  junior  cap- 
tain, will  each  align  the  company  on  its  left,  and  then 
command : 

Front. 

521.  The  three  divisions,  faced  to  the  left,  will  put 
themselves  in  march  ;  the  left  guide  of  the  sec-ond 
will  direct  himself  parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle  ;  the 
left  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  division  will  march 
aljreast  with  the  guide  of  the  second;  the  guides  of 
the  third  and  fourth,  each  preserving  the  prescribed 
distance  between  himself  and  the  guide  of  the  division 
which  pretjeded  his  own  in  the  colunm. 


522.  The  chief  of  the  second  division  will  not  fol- 
low its  movement;  he  will  see  it  file  l>y  him,  and 
when  its  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him,  ho 
will  command : 

1.  Second  division.     2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.         119 

52"*.  The  first  C(nmnand  will  be  given  when  the 
division  shall  yet  have  seven  or  eight  paces  to  march; 
the  second,  when  the  right,  guide  shall  be  abreast 
with  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  the  third  iiuoiedi- 
ately  after  the  second. 

524.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will  halt; 
at  the  third,  it  will  f  tee  to  the  front,  and  if  there  be 
openings  between  the  files,  the  chief  of  the  division 
will  cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the  right; 
the  left  guides  of  both  companit's  will  step  upon  the 
line  of  battle,  face  to  the  right,  and  place  themselves 
on  the  direction  of  the  markers  e.^tablisbeil  before 
the  first  division,  each  guide  opposite  to  one  of  the 
three  left  files  of  his  company. 

rvio.  The  division  having  faced  to  the  front,  its 
chief  will  place  himself  accurately  on  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, on  the  left  of  the  first  division  ;  and  when  he  shall 
see  the  guides  assured  on  the  direction,  he  will  com- 
mand. Right — Dress.  At  this,  the  division  will  be 
aligned  by  the  right  in  the  manner  indicated  for  the 
first. 

r>0().  The  third  and  fourth  division  will  continue  to 
march:  at  the  commind  halt,  given  to  the  second, 
the  chief  of  the  third  will  halt  in  his  own  person, 
place  himself  exactly  opposite  to  the  guide  of  the 
second,  after  this  division  shall  have  faced  to  the  front 
and  closed  its  file-;  he  will  see  his  division  file  pasj;, 
and  when  his  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him, 
he  will  command  : 


1.  Third  division.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 

527.  As  soon  as  the  divisicm  faces  to  the  front,  its 


120  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

chief  will  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre, 
and  cuiuumud  : 


1.   Thii-d  division,  forioard.     2.   Guide  right.     3. 
March. 

528.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  march 
towards  the  line  of  battle;  the  right  guide  will  so  di- 
rect himself  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  man  on 
the  left  of  the  eecoiid  division,  and  when  the  division 
is  at  three  paces  from  ihe  line  of  buttle,  its  chief  will 
halt  it  and  align  it  by  the  right. 

529.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  conform 
himself  (and  the  chief  «tf  the  fifth,  if  there  be  a  fifth) 
to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  third. 

530.  The  deployment,  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides— FOSTS. 


531.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  resume 
their  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  will 
retire. 

532.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  first  division  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  make  the  dis])ositions  in- 
dicated Nos.  512  and  513,  and  when  the  first  division 
shall  have  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  line,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  On  the  first 'division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion 
by  the  left  fiank.  3.  March  for  double  quick — 
March.) 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.         lai^ 

533.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  halt,  and  will  command. 
First  division  ;  the  other  diiefs  will  caution  their  di- 
visions to  face  by  the  left  flank. 

534.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  the  rear  divisions,  the  cliief  of  the  first 
division  will  command  Halt,  and  will  alio^n  his  divi- 
sioa  by  the  right  against  the  markers;  the  other  di- 
visions will  face  to  the  left,  their  chiefs  hastening  to 
the  left  of  their  divisions.  The  second  division  will 
conform  its  movements  to  ^'hat  is  prescribed  Nos. 
522  and  following.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  526  and  fallow- 
ing; but  the  chief  of  each  division  will  halt  in  his 
own  person  at  the  command  march  given  by  the 
chief  of  the  divisitm  which  precedes  him,  and  when 
the  right  of  his  division  arrives  abreast  of  him,  he 
will  command : 

Such  division,  by  the  right  flank — MARCH. 

535.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  position 
of  the  guides,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  No. 
431.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  fourth  division. 

536.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  the  column 
without  halting  it,  and  to  continue  the  march,  the 
markers  will  not  be. posted;  the  movement  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same  means 
as  the  foregoing,  but  with  the  following  modifica- 
tions: 

537.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  command,  1.  Guide  right.  2,  Quick 
time.     At  the  command,  Double  (jmck — March,  given 


.J  22  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

by  the  colonel,  the  first  division  will  march  in  quick 
time  and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right; 
the  captains  will  iJuce  themselves  on  the  right  of 
their  respective  companies;  the  captain  on  the  right 
of  the  battalion  will  take  points  ou  the  ground  Ut  as- 
sure the  direction  of  the  march.  The  chief  of  the 
second  division  will  allow  his  division  to  file  past 
him,  and  when  he  sees  its  right  abreast  of  hini,  he 
will  command,  1.  Second  division,  by  the  right  flank. 
2.  MAiiCH.  3.  Giti^/c  r>■o■/i^  and  when  this  division  shidl 
arrive  on  the  alignment  of  the  first,  he  will  cause  it 
to  march  in  quick  time.  The  third  and  fourth  divi- 
sions will  deploy  according  to  the  same  principles  as 
the  second. 

538.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  major,  and  co- 
lor-bearer will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  458. 

539.  The  cohmel  will  see,  pending  the  movement, 
that  the  principles  just  prescribed  are  duly  obsei-ved, 
and  particularly  that  the  division,  in  deploying,  be 
not  halted  too  soon  or  too  late.  He  will  correct 
promptly  and  quickly  the  faults  that  may  be  commit- 
ted, and  prevent  their  propagation.  This  rule  is  gen- 
eral for  all  deployments. 

540.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if,  instead  of- de- 
ploying it  on  the  first,  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy 
it  ou  the  rearmost  division,  he  will  cause  the  disposi- 
tions to  be  made  indicated  No.  511  and  following; 
but  it  will  be  the  right  general  guide  whom  he  will 
send  to  pLice  himself  beyond  the  point  at  which  the 
right  of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  deployed. 

54J.*  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  123 

1.  On   the  fourth  (or   such)   divisioiy  deploy   column. 
2.  Battalion,  right — Face. 

542.  At  the  first  conmiand,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast;  the  chiefs  of  the 

'other  divisions  will  caution  them  that  they  will  have 
to  face  to  the  right. 

543.  At  the  second  command,- the  first  three  divi- 
sions will  face  to  the  right;  and  the  ch-ief  <!f  each 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  right  guide. 

544.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  place  a  third  marker  between  the  first  two,  so 
that  this  marker  may  be  o])posite  to  one  of  the 
three  right  files  of  the  left  company  of  the  division; 
the  lieutenant  colonel  will  then  place  himself  in  the 
line  of  battle  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at  which 
the  right  of  the  third  division  will  rest  when  de- 
ployed. 

545.  The  colonel  will  then  command: 

3.  March  (or  douhle  quick— ^Iarch.) 

546.  At  this  command,  the  three  right  divisions  will 
put  themselves  in  march,  the  guide  of  the  first  so  di- 

i  reeting  himself  as  to  pass  three  paces  within  the  line 
marked  by  the  right  general  guide.  The  chief  of  the 
third  division  will  not  follow  its  nioven^ent ;  he  will 
see  it  file  past,  halt  it  when  its  left  guide  shall  be 
abreast  with  him,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front; 

Sand,  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  he  will 
cause  them  to  be  proniptly  closed  to  the  left. 


124  SCHOOL  OF  TEIE  BATTALF N— PART  IV. 

547.  The  chi^f  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he  sees 
it  nearly  unmasked  by  the  three  others,  will  com- 
mand: 


].  Fourth  division,  foricrad.    2.  Guide  left. 
3.  March 

548.  At  the  commind  march,  which  will  be  given 
the  instant  the  fourth  is  unmasked,  this  division  will 
approach  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at  three  paces 
from  the  markers  on  that  line,  its  chief  will  halt  it, 
and  command : 

Lf/<— Dress. 

549.  At  this  command,  the  divisiou  will  dress  for- 
ward against  the  markers;  the  chief  of  the  division 
and  the  junior  captain  will  each  align  the  compitny  on 
his' right,  and  then  command: 

Front. 

550.  TJre  instant  that  the  third  division  is  unmask- 
ed, its  chief  will  cause  it  to  approach  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  halt  it  in  the  manner  just  prescribed  for  the 
fourth. 

551.  The  moment  the  division  halts,  its  right  guide 
and  the  covering  sergeant  of  its  left  company  will  step 
on  the  line  of  battle,  placing  themselves  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  markers  established  in  front  of  the 
fourth  division;  as  so(m  as  they  shall  be  assured  in 
their  positions,  the  division  wiH  be  aligned  as  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  fourth. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.        125 

552.  The  second  and  first  divisions  which  will  have 
continued  to  march,  will,  in  succession,  be  halted  and 
aligned  by  the  left,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  third  ; 
the  chiefs  of  these  divisions  will  conform  themselves 
to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  526.  The  second  being 
near  the  line  of  battle,  the  command  will  not  be  giv- 
en for  ij;  to  move  on  this  line,  but  it  will  be  dressed 
up  to  it. 

553  The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

'     Guides— FosTS. 

554.  At  this  command,  the  ehieti?  of  division  and 
the  guides  will  resume  their  places  in  line  of  battle, 
and  the  markers  will  retire. 

555.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  posi- 
tions of  the  guides  by  the  means  indicated.  No.  431, 
and  the  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with 
the  fourth  division. 

556.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  fbiu-th  division,  he  will 
make  the  dispositions  indicated-,  No.  511  and  follow- 
ing ;  and  when  the  head  of  the  column  shall  arrive 
within  three  paces  of  the  line,  he  will  command  : 

1,  On  the  fourth  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battal- 
ion, by  the  right  flank.  3.  March  (or  double  quick 
— March.) 

557.  ,At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  caution  it  to  halt,  and  will  command, 
Fourth  division  ;  the'chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will 
caution  their  divisions  to  face  to  the  right. 


126  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  JV. 

558.  At  the  comin;iiKl  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  the  tirst  three  divisions,  the  chief  of  the 
fourth  will  cornmaiid  :  Halt.  The  first  three  divi- 
situis  will  face  to  the  riglit,  and  be  directed  parallelly 
to  ,the  line  of  battle.  Tlie  chief  of  each  of  these 
divisions  wi  1  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  right 
guide.  The  chief  of  the  third  division  will  see  his 
division  tile  past  him,  and  when  his  left  guide  is 
abreast  of  him,  he  will  halt  it,  and  face  it  to  the 
front.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he 
shall  see  it  nearly  unmasked,  will  command:  1. 
Fourth  division  forward ;  2.  Guide  left  ;  3.  March 
for  double  quick — Makch.J  This  division  will  move 
towards  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at  three  paces 
from  this  line,  it  will  be  halted  by  its  chief,  and  align- 
ed by  the  left. 

559.  The  chief  of  the  third  divi.non  will  move  his 
division  forward,  conforming  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  fourth. 

560.  The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  first  divisioYis, 
after  halting  their  divisions,  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed.  No.  552. 

561.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  d'Cploy  on  the 
fourth  division,  without  halting  the  column,  and  to 
continue  to  iiiurch  forward,  he  will  not  have  markers 
posted,  and  the  movement  wiH  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands  and  the  same  means,  with  the  tullow- 
ing  modifications ;  the  fourth  division,  when  un- 
Kasked,  will  be  moved  forward  in  quick  time,  and 
will  continue  to  march,  instead  of  being  halted,  and 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbov\>s  to  the  left.  The  third 
division,  on  being  unmasked,  will  be  moved  to  the 
front  in  double  quick  time,  but  when  it  arrives  on  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  127 

alijjnmeiit  of  the  fourth  it  will  take  the  quick  step, 
and  dress  to  the  left  until  the  command  Guide  centre, 
is  given  by  the  colonel  The  chiefs  of  the  second  and 
first  divisions  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescrib- 
ed for  the  third.  When  the  first  division  phuU  arrive 
on  the  line,  the  colonel  nuiy  cause  the  battalion  to 
take  the  double  quick  step. 

562.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  con- 
form to  what  has  been  prescribed,  Nos.  458  and 
459. 


i'>()3.  To  deploy  the  column  on  an  interior  division, 
the  colonel  will  cause  the  line  to  be  traced  by  the 
means  above  indicated,  and  the  general  guides  will 
move  briskly  on  the  liriC,  as  prescribed  Ntis.  513  and 
540.  This  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  coul- 
maud : 

1.  On  such  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion 
outwards — FACE.  3.  MARCH  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

564.  Whether  the  column  be  with  the  right  or  left 
in  front,  the  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in  battle, 
bel(»ng  to  the  right  of  the  directing  one,  will  fitce  to 
the  right;  the  others,  except  the  directing  division, 
will  face  to  the  left ;  the  divisions  in  front  of  the  latter 
will  deploy  by  the  means  indicated,  No.  542,  and  fol- 
lowing ;  those  in  its  rear  will  deploy  as  is  prescribed, 
No.  513,  and  following. 

565".  The  directing  division,  the  instant  it  finds  it- 
self unmasked,  will  approach  the  line  of  battle,  taking 


128  SCHOOL  OF  THE  B;VTTA LION— PART  IV. 

the  guide  left  or  right,  according  as  the  right  or  left 
of  the  eoliiiiin  inaj'  be  iu  fr^nt.  The  chief  of  this  di- 
vision will  align  it  by  the  directing  flank,  and  then 
step  back  into  the  rear,  in  order  uiouieutarily  to  give 
place  to  the  chief  of  the  next  for  aligning  the  next 
division. 

566.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  positions 
of  the  guides  of  divisions,  wliich  in  the  line  of  battle, 
take  the.  right  of  the  directing  division,  and  the 
major  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  other  guides. 

567.  If  the  column  be  in  inarch,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  On  such  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion, 
hj  the  right  and  left  Jlanks.  3.  MARCH  Cor  dou- 
ble quick — March.) 

568.  The  divisions  v/hich  are  iu  front  of  the  direc 
ingone  will  deploy  by  the  means  indicated,  Nos.  557, 
and  following  ;  those  iu  rear,  as  prescribed,  No.  5'33, 
and  following. 

569.  The  directing  division,  when  unmasked,  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  fourth  division, 

No.  558. 

570.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel  and  major  will  ' 
conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed,  Nos.  458  and 
459. 

571.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  deployments  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  in- 
verse means. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.        129 
Remarks    on   the    deployment  of  columns,    closed    in 


572.  All  the  divisions  ought  to  deploy  rectangularly, 
to  march  off  abreast,  and  to  preserve  their  distances 
towards  the  line  of  battle. 

573.  Each  division,  the  instant  that  it  is  unmasked, 
ought  to  be  marched  towards  the  line  of  battle,  and 
to  be  aligned  upon  it  by  the  flank  next  to  the  direct- 
ing division  ;  the  latt^,  whether  the  right  or  left  be 
in  front,  will  always  be  aligned  by  the  ^ank  next  to 
the  point  of  appui,  when  the  deploj'inent  is  made  on 
the  first  or  last  division  ;  but  if  the  column  be  de- 
ployed on  an  interior  division,  this  division  will  be 
aligned  by  the  flank  which  was  that  of  direction. 

574.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  see  that,  in  deploy- 
ing, the  principles  prescribed  for  marching  by  the 
flank  are  well  observed,  and  if  openings  between  the 
files  occur,  which  ought  not  to  happen  except  on  bro 
ken  or  difficult  grounds,  the  openings  ought  to  be 
promptly  closed  towards  the  directing  flank  as  soon 
as  the  divisions  face  to  the  front, 

575.  If  a  chief  of  divisioa  give  the  command  halt, 
or  the  command,  by  the  right  or  left  flank,  too  soon  or 
too  late,  his  division  will  be  obliged  to  oblique  to 
the  right  or  left  in  approaching  the  line  of  battle,  and 
his  fault  may  lead  the  following  subdivision  into 
error. 

576.  In  the  divisions  which  deploy  by  the  left  flank, 
it  is  always  the  left  guide  of  each  company  who  ought 
to  pliice   himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  to  mark   the 

9* 


130        SCHOOL  OF  TOE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

diriection ;  in   divisions   vv'hich  'deploy   by    the    right 
flank,  it  is  the  riglit  guide. 

577.  A  column  by  company,  ch)sed  in  mass,  may 
be  formed  to  the  left  or  to  the  right  into  line,  in  the 
same  mnnner  as  a  column  at  halfdistnnce,  and  by  the 
means  indicated,  No.  502,  and  following.    ^ 

578.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  may 
be  formed  on  the  right  or  on  the  left  into  line  of 
battle,  as  a  column  at  half  distance  ;  but  in  order  to 
execute  this  movement,  without  arresting  the  march 
of  the  column,  it  is  necessary  that  the  guides  avoid, 
with  the  greatest  care,  shortening  the  step  in  turning, 
and  that  the  men  near  them,  respectively,  conform 
themselves  rapidly  to  the  movements  of  their  guides. 

Remarks  on  inversions. 

579.  Inversions  giving  frequently  the  means  of 
forming  line  of  battle,  in  the  promptest  manner, 
are  of  great  utility  in  the  movements  of  an  army. 

580.  The  application  that  may  be  made  of  inver- 
sions in  the  foimations  to  the  right  and  to  the  left  in 
line  of  battle,  has  been  indicated.  No.  407,  and  follow- 
ing. They  may  also  be  advantageously  employed  in 
the  successive  formations,  except  in  that  of  faced  to 
the  rear,  into  line  of  battle. 

581.  Formations,  by  inversion,  will  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  tiie  same  principles  as  formations  in  the 
direct  order:  but  the  colonel's  first  command  will 
always  begin  by  inversion, 

582.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle  by  inver-. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.    131 

sion,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish,  by  forming  it  into 
column,  to  bring  it  back  to  the  direct  order,  he  will 
cause  it  either  to  break  or  to  ploy  hy  company,  or 
by  division,  accordingly  as  the  column  may  have  been 
by  company  or  by  division  before  it  had  been  formed 
.into  line  of  battle  by  inversion. 

583.  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  formed  by 
inversion,  has  to  be  deployed  into  column,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  according  tCt  the  same  princi- 
ples as  if  the  line  were  in  the  direct  order,  but  ob- 
serving what  follows. 

584.  If  it  be  intended  that  the  column  shall  be  by 
division,  with  the  first  in  front,  or  by  company,  with 
the  first  company  in  front,  the  colonel  will  announce 
in. the  second  command — left  in  front,  heenuse  the 
battalion  being  in  line  of  battle  by  inversion,  that  sub- 
division is  on  the  left. 

585.  Each  chief  whose  subdivision  takes  position 
in  the  column  in  front  of  the  directing  one,  will  con- 
duct his  subdivision  till  it  halts  ;  and  each  chief  whose 
subdivision  takes  position  in  rear  of  the  directing  one, 
will  halt  in  his  own  person  when  up  with  t^e  pre- 
ceding right  guide,  and  see  his  subdivision  file  past; 
and  each  chief  will  align  his  subdivision  by  the  right. 
When  the  column  is  to  be  put  in  march,  the  second" 
command  will  be — guide  left,  because  the  proper 
right  is  in  front. 

586.  For  the  same  reason,  if  it  be  intended  thai 
the  last  subdivision  shall  be  in  front,  right  in  front, 
will  be  announced  in  the  second  command ;  the  sub- 
divisions will  be  aligned  by  the  left,  and  to   put  the 


13-2  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

column  in  march,  .the  second  command  will  be,  guide 
right,  because  the  proper  left  is  in  front. 


PART  FIFTH. 
Article  First. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

587.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  and 
supposed  to  be  the  directing  one,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  marcJi  in  line  of  battle,  he  will  give  the 
lieutenant  colonel  an  intimation  of  his  purpose,  place 
himself  about  forty  paces  in  rear  of  the  color-file  aud 
face  to  the  front. 

588.  The  lieutenant  colonel  wil  place  himself  a  like 
distance  in  front  of  the  same  file,  and  face  to  the 
colonel,  who  will  establish  him  as  correctly  as  pos- 
sible, by  signal  of  the  sword,  perpendicularly  to  the 
line  of  battle  opposite  to  the  color-bearer.  The  co- 
lonel will  next,  above  the  heads  of  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  color-bearer,  take  a  point  of  direction  in 
the  field  beyond,  if  a  distinct  one  present  itself,  ex- 
actly in  the  prolongation  of  those  first  two  points. 

589.  The  colonel  will  then  move  twenty  paces  far- 
ther to  the  rear,  and  establish  two  markers  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  straight  line  passing  through  the 
color-bearer  and  the  lieutenant  colonel ;  these  markers 
will  face  to  the  rear,  the  first  placed  about  twenty- 
five  paces  behind  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion,  and 
the  second  at  the  same  distance  from  the  first. 


RT  V.  133 

icted  to  lake, 
il  be  establish- 

the  ground  iu 
limseif,  would 
r  ;  the  first  of 

twenty  paces 


le,  the  colonel 


t)lor-guard  will 
rporals  .in  the 
front  rank,  and 
•ank  of  file  clo- 
ral  guides  will 
lor-bearer,  the 
in  of  the  ri^ht 
sergeant  who 


will  shift,  pass- 
:)f  their  respec- 
ft  of  thebattal- 
The  covering 
>ft  of  thecolor- 


issured  the  col- 

and   the  corpo- 

;ank,  will  go  to 

indicated,  No. 


132  SCHOOL 

column  in  marcl 
right,  because  tl 


To 

587.  The  bat; 
supposed  to  be  tl 
shall  wish  to  mai 
lieutenant  colone 

himself  about  fori  m 

face  to  the  front.  M 

5S3.  The  lieute  '  , " 

distance  in  front  -: — ^-^ °^ 

colonel,   who  will 

sible,  by  signal  of 

line  of  battle   oppi 

lonel  will  next,  a 

colonel  and  color-l 

the  field  beyond,  i  I 

actly  in  the  prolan      ♦  i 

589.  The  colone 
ther  to  the  rear,  i 
prolongation  of  the 
color-bearer  and  th 
will  face  to  the  re; 
five  paces  behind  t 
the  second  at  the  s 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  133 

590.  The  color-bearer  will  be  instructed  to  take, 
the  moment  the  lieutenant  colonel  shall  be  establish- 
ed on  the  perpendicular,  two  points  ou  the  ground  iu 
the  straight  Hue  which,  drawn  from  himself,  would 
pass  between  the  heels  of  that  officer ;  the  first  of 
these  points  will  be  taken  at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces 
from  the  color-bearer.  • 

591.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  Battalion,  foricard. 

^92.  At  this,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard  will 
advance  six  paces  to  the  front ;  the  corporals  -in  the 
rear  rank  will  place  themselves  in  the  front  rank,  and 
these  will  be  replaced  by  those  iu  the  rank  of  file  clo- 
sers ;  at  the  same  time  the  two  geueral  guides  will 
move  in  advance,  abreast  with  the  color-bearer,  the 
one  on  the  right,  opposite  to  the  captain  of  the  ri^bt 
company,  the  other  opposite  to  the  sergeant  who 
closes  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

593.  The  captains  of  the  left  wing  will  shift,  pass- 
ing before  the  front  rank,  to  the  left  of  tbeir  respec- 
tive companies  ;  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battal- 
ion will  step  back  into  the  rear  rank.  The  covering 
sergeant  of  the  company  next  on  the  left  of  thecoJor- 
company,  will  step  into  the  front  rank. 

594.  The  lieutenant  colonel  having  assured  the  col- 
or-bearer on  the  line  between  himself  and  the  corpo- 
ral of  the  color-file,  now  in  the  front  rank,  will  go  to 
the  position  which  will  be  hereinafter  indicated.  No. 
602. 


1^4  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

595.  The  major  will  place  himself  six  or  eight  paces 
on  either  flank  of  the  color-ruuk. 


596.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


597.  At  this  command,  the  battalion  will  step  oiF 
with  life  ;  the  color-bearer,  charged  with  the  step  and 
direction,  will  s(jrnpulously  ob!>erve  the  length  and 
cadence  of  the  pace,  ir  arching  on  the  prolongation  of 
the  two  pcints  previously  taken,  and  successively  tak- 
ing others  in  advance  by  the  means  indicated  in  the 
school  of  the  conipany;  the  corporal  on  his  right,  and 
the  one  on  his  left,  will  march  in  the  same  step,  tak- 
ing care  not  to  turn  the  he  id  or  shoulders,  the  color- 
bearer  supporting  the  color  lance  against  the  hip. 

598.  The  two  gerjci-al  guides  will  march  in  the 
same  step  with  the  color-rank,  each  maintaining  him- 
self-abreast,  or  nearly  so,  with  that  rank,  and  neither 
occupying  himself  with  the  movement  of  the  other. 

599.  The  three  corporals  of  the  color-guard,  now 
in  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion,  will  march  well 
aligned,  elbow  to  elbow,  heads  direct  to  the  front, 
and  without  deranging  the  line  of  their  shoulders  ; 
the  centre  one  will  follow  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the 
color-bearer,  and  maintain  the  same  step,  without 
lengthening  or  shortening  it,  except  on  an  intimation 
from  the  colonel  or  lieutenant  colonel,  although  he 
should  find  himself  more  or  less  than  six  paces  from 
the  cok»r-rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V  135 

600.  The  covering  sergeant  in  the  front  rank  be- 
tween the  color  company  and  the  next  on  the  left, 
will  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  ou  the  same  line,  with 
the  three  corporals  in  the  centre,  his  head  well  to  the 
front. 


COJ .  The  captains  of  the  color  company,  and  the 
company  next  to  the  left,  will  constitute,  with  the 
three  eor[)orals  in  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  the 
basis  of  alignment  for  both  wings  of  the  battalion; 
they  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  color-bear- 
er, and  exert  themselves  to  maintain  their  shoulders 
exactly  in  the  square  with  the  direction.  To  this  end, 
they  will  keep  their  heads  direct  to  the  front,  only 
occasionally  casting  an  eye  on  the  three  centre  cor- 
porals, with  the  slightest  possible  turn  of  the  neck, 
and  if  they  perceive  themselves  in  advance,  or  in  rear 
of  these  corporals,  the  captain,  or  two  captains,  will 
almost  insensibly  shorten  or  lengthen  the  step,  so  as, 
at  the  end  of  several  paces,  to  regain  the  ti-ue  align- 
ment, without  giving  sudden  checks  or  impulsions  to 
the  wings  beyond  them  respectively. 

602.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  twelve  or  fif- 
teen paces  on  the  right  of  the  captain  of  the  color- 
company,  will  maintain  this  captain  and  the  next  one 
beyond,  abreast  with  the  three  centre  corporals ;  to 
this  end,  he  will  caution  either  to  lengthen  or  to  short- 
en the  step  as  may  be  necessary,  which  the  captain,  or 
two  captains,  will  execute  as  has  just  been  explained. 


603.  All  the  other  captains  will  maintain  them- 
selves on  the  prcdongation  of  this  basis  ;  and,  to  this 
end,  they  will  cast  their  eyes  towards  the  centre, tak- 


136  •       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BAIT'A LION— PART  V. 

ing  cave  to  turn  the  neck  but  gliofhtly,  and  not  to  de- 
range the  direction  of  their  shoulder. 

604:  The  captains  will  observe  the  march  of  their 
companies,  and  prevent  the  men  from  getting  in  ad- 
vance of  the  line  of  captains;  they  will  not  lengthen 
or  shorten  step  except  when  evidently  necessary ;  be- 
cause, to  correct,  with  too  scrupulous  attention,  small 
faults,  is  apt  to  cause  the  production  of  greater — loss 
of  calmness,  silence,  and  equality  of  step,  each  of, 
which  it  is  so  important  to  maintain. 

605.  The  men  will  constantly  keep  their  heads  well 
directed  to  the  front,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  towards 
the  centre,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the  flank, 
give  the  greatest  attention  to  the  squareness  (»f  should- 
ers, and  hold  themselves  always  very  slightly  behind 
the  line  of  the  captains,  in  order  never  to  shut  out 
from  the  view  of  the  latter  the  basis*of  alignment ; 
they  will,  from  time  to  time,  cast  an  eye  on  the  col- 
or-rank, or  on  the  general  guide  of  the  wing,  in  order 
to  march  constantly  in  the  same  step  with  those  ad- 
vanced persons. 

60G.  Pending  the  march,  the  line  determined  by 
the  two  markers  (h  and  d)  will  be  prolonged  by  plac- 
ing, in  proportion  as  the  battalion  advances,  a  third 
mai-ker  (i)  in  the  rear  of  the  fii'st  (h),  then  the  mark- 
er (d)  will  quit  his  place  and  go  a  like  distance  in 
rear  of  (i);  the  marker  (h)  will,  in  his  turn,  do  the 
like  in  respect  to  (d),  and  so  on,  in  sucqessiou,  as 
long  as  the  battalion  continues  to  advance;  each 
marker,  on  shifting  position,*  taking  care  to  face  to 
the  rear,  and  to  cover  accurately  the  two  markers  al- 
ready established  on  the  direction.  A  staif  officer, 
or  the    quartermaster   sergeant,  designated  for  the 


jly  fifteen 
from  the 
1  to  shift 
?hind  the 


self  about 
t)attalion, 
markers, 
:alion,  or 
617  and 
)r-bearer 
lud : 


5teu  thir- 
nk,  halt, 
direction 
e  sword; 
will  then 
Tom  the 
e  should- 
conform 


self  upon 
,  the  ma- 
e  to  the 
the  cor- 
len  take 


ROT] 


M.il- 


I 
ino-  care  tc  I  } 

range  the  |  ! 

604:  Th>  ^. 

companies  . 

vance  of  tl  I 

or  shorten  j 

cause,  to  c  i 

faults,  is  a  ,  | 

of  calmnes  j 
which  it  is 

605.  Th 
directed  t( 
the  centre 
give  the  gi 
ers,  and  h( 
the  line  ol 
from  the  ^ 
they  will, 
or-rank,  oi 
to  march  ( 
vanced  pe 

606.  Pe 
the  twf»  m 
iug,  in  pro 
marker  (i 
er  (rf)  wi] 
rear  of  (i 
like  in  re.' 
long  as  th 
marker,  o 
the  rear,  i 
ready  esta 
or  the   qi 


SCHOOL  OF  TOE  BATTALION-  PART  V.    137 

purpose,  and  who  will  hold  himself  constantly  fifteen 
or  twenty  paces  fiicing  the  marker  farthest  from  the 
battalion,  will  caution  each  marker  when  to  shift 
place,  and  assure  him  on  the  direction  behind  the 
other  two. 


607.  The  colonel  will  habitually  hold  himself  about 
thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  his  battalion, 
taking  care  not  to  put  himself  on  the  line  of  markers, 
if,  for  example,  by  the  slanting  of  the  battalion,  or 
the  indications  which  will  be  given,  Nos.  617  and 
following,  he  finds  that  the  march  of  the  color-bearer 
is  not  perpendicular,  he  will  promptly  command  : 


Point  of  direction  to  the  right  for  left). 


608.  At  this  command,  v|;he  major  will  hasten  thir- 
ty or  forty  paces  in  advance  of  the  color-rank,  halt, 
face  to  the  colonel,  and  place  himself  on  the  direction 
which  the  latter  will  indicate  by  signal  of  the  sword; 
the  corporal  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion  will  then 
dii-ect  himself  upon  the  major,  on  a  caution  from  the 
colonel,  advancing,  to  that  end,  the  opposite  should- 
er ;  the  corporals  on  his  right  and  left  will  conform 
themselves  to  his  direction. 

609.  The  color-bearer  will  also  direct  himself  upon 
the  major,  advancing  the  opposite  shoulder,  the  ma- 
jor causing  him,  at  the  same  time,  to  incline  to  the 
right  or  left,  until  he  shall  exactly  cover  the  cor- 
poral of  his  file  ;  the  color-bearer  will  then  take 
points  on  the  ground  in  this  ne^  direction. 


138  SCHOOL  OF  THK  BATTALION— PART  V. 

610.  The  two  general  guides  will  coiiftn'in  them- 
selves to  the  new  direction  of  the  color-rank. 

611.  The  officer  charged  with  observing  the  suc- 
ces^sive  replacing  of  the  markers  in  the  rear  of  the 
centre,  will  establish  them  promptly  on  the  new  di- 
rection, taking  for  basis  the  color-bearer  and  the 
corporal  of  his  file  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion; 
the  colonel  will  verify  thi3  new  direction  of  the 
markers. 

612.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  from  the  position  giv- 
en, No.  602,  will  see  that  the  two  centre  companies, 
and  successively  all  the  others,  conform  themselves  to 
the  new  direction  of  the  ceiiti-e,  but  without  precip- 
itancy or  disorder  ;  he  will  then  endeavor  to  maintain 
that  basis  of  alignment  for  the  battalion,  perpendic- 
ularly to  the  direction  pursued  by  the  color  bearer. 

613.  He  will  often  observe  the  march  of  the  two 
wings;  and,  if  he  discover  that  the  cap'tains  neglect 
to  conform  themselves  to  the  basis  of  alignment,  he 
will  recall  their  attention. by  the  command — captain 
of  (such)  company,  or  captains  o/(such)  companies, 
on  the  line  —  without,  however,  endeavoring  too 
scrupulously  to  correct  small  faults. 

614.  The  mnjor  on  the  flmk  of  the  color-rank  will, 
during  the  march,  place  himself,  from  ti\ne  to  time, 
twenty  paces  in  front  of  that  "rank,  face  to  the  rear, 
and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  pndotigation  of 
the  marktM-s  established  behind  the  centre,  in  order 
to  verity  the  exact  march  cf  the  color-bearer  on  that 
line  ;  he  will  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  direction  of  the 
color-bearer,   who   will   immediately  take  two  new 


619.  If  openings  bo  f(»rmed,  if  the  files  crowd 
!a.eh  other  if,  in  short,  disorder  ensue,  the  remedy 
)ught  to  be  applied  as  promptly  as  possible,    but 


m 


I 


^KSM^nSSSMMSSSimmE^. 


teiiifiifissteaMiiiBi 


li> 


3ZZZIIS 


x^_    H'     he: 


s   2 y,  ""izirzzzi::" 


Lij        *       ;     t 

V 

^4-^^ 

i                   -  1 . 

!                                  at.-                                                                     \ 

4 

m 

1    '    •     .■■.--.            .-: 

.-  .--£,^_: — ^  . 

-»■ 

^•-^.^- 

a(ffliiiiiiiMaj''is»iiHffii 


-r-—  T  ~*r*. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  139 

points  on  the  ground  between  liimself  and  the  ma- 
jor. 

615.  All  the  principles  applicable  to  the  advance 
in  line,  are  the  same  for  a  subordinate  as  for  the  di- 
recting battalion ;  but  when  the  battalion  under  in- 
struction is  supposed  to  be  subordinate,  no  markers 
will  be  placed  behind  its  centre. 


Remarks  on  the  advance  in  line  of  battle. 


616.'  If,  in  the  exercises  of  detail,  or  courses  of  ele- 
mentary instruction,  the  officers,  sergeants,  corporals, 
and  men,  have  not  been  well  confirmed  in  the  princi- 
ples of  the  position  underarms,  as  well  as  in  the  length 
and  cadence  of  the  step,  the  march  of  the  battalion  in 
line  will  be  floating,  unsteady,  and  disunited. 

617.  If  the  color-bearer,  instead  of  marching  per- 
pendicularly forward,  pursue  an  oblique  direction, 
the  battalion  will  slant ;  crowdings  in  (uie  wing,  and 
openings  in  the  other,  will  follow,  and  these  defects 
in  the  march,  becoming  more  and  more  embarrassing 
in  proportion  to  the  deviation  from  the  perpendicular, 
will  commence  near  the  centre. 

6iy.  It  is  then  of  the  greatest  importance  that  the 
color-bearer  should  direct  himself  perpendicularly 
forwai'd,  and  that  the  basis  of  alignment  sh(»uld  al- 
ways be  perpendicular  to  the  line  pursued  by  him. 

619.  If  openings  be  formed,  if  the  files  crowd 
ea«h  other,  if,  in  short,  disorder  ensue,  the  remedy 
ought  to  be  applied  as  promptly  as  possible,    but 


140         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

calmly,  with  few  words,  and  as  little  noise  as  practi- 
cable. 

620.  The  object  of  the  general  guides,  in  the  march 
in  line  of  battle  is,  to  indicate  to  the  companies  near 
the  flanks  the  step  of  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  and 
to  afford  more  facility  in  establishing  the  wings  on  the 
direction  of  the  centre  if  they  should  betoo  much  in 
the  rear;  hence  the  necessity  that  these  guides  should 
maintain  the  same  step,  and  march  abreast,  wr  very 
nearly  so,  with  the  color-rank,  which  it  will  be  easy 
for  them  to  do  by  casting  from  time  to  time  an  eye  on 
that  rank. 

621.  If  the  battalion  happen  to  lose  the  step,  the 
colonel  will  recall  its  attention  by  the  command,  to 
the — Step  ;  captains  and  their  companies  will  im- 
mediately cast  an  eye  on  the  color-rank,  or  one  of 
the  general  guides,  and  promptly  conform  themselves 
to  the  step. 

622.  Finally,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to  the 
attainment  of  regularity  in  the  march  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, to  habituate  the  battalion  to  execute  with  as  much 
order  as  promptness  the  inovements  prescribed  No. 
607  and  following,  for  rectifying  the  direction  ;  it  is 
not  less  essential  that  commanders  of  biittalions 
should  exercise  themselves,  with  the  greatest  care, 
in  forming  their  own  coup  iVocil  in  order  to  be  able 
to  judge  with  precision  the  direction  to  be  given  to 
their  battalions. 


school  of  tfie  battalion -part  v.       141 
Article  Second. 

Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

623.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  canse  it  to  oblique,  he  will 
command : 

1.    Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.    March  (or   double 

quick — March  ). 

624.  At  the  first  command,  the  major  will  place 
himself  in  front  of,  and  faced  to  the  color-bearer. 

625.  At  the  command  march,  the'  whole  battalion 
will  take  the  oblique  stop.  The  companies  and  cap- 
tains will  strictly  observe  the  principles  established 
in  the  school  of  the  company. 

626.  The  major  in  front  of  the  color-bearer  ought 
to  maintain  the  latter  in  a  line  with  the  centre  cor- 
poral, so  that  the  color-bearer  may  oblique  neither 
more  nor  less  than  that  corporal.  He  will  carefully 
observe  also  that  they  follow  parallel  directions  and 
preserve  the  same  length  of  step. 

627.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  take  care  that  the 
captains  and  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre  keep 
exactly  on  a  line  and  follow  parallel  directions. 

628.  The  colonel  will  see  that  the  battalion  pre- 
serves its  parallelism;  he  will  exert  himself  to  pre- 
vent the  files  from  opening  or  crowding.  If  he  per- 
ceive the  latter  fault,  he  will  cause  the  files  on  the 
flank, -to  which  the  battalion  obliques,  to  open  out. 


142        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

629.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  direct  march  to  be 
resumed,  will  command : 

1.  Foricard.     2.     March. 

630.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  re- 
sume the  direct  march.  The  major  will  place  himself 
thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  color-bearer,  and  face  to 
the  colonel,  who  will  establish  him,  by  a  signal  of 
the  swonl,  on  the  direction  wliich  the  coloj-  bearer 
ought  to  pursue.  The  latter  will  immediately  take 
two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the 
major. 

631.  In  resuming  the  direct  march,  care  will  be 
taken  that  the  men  do  not  close  the  intervals  which 
may  exist  between  the  files  at  once ;  it  should  be  done 
almost  insensibly. 

Remarks  on  the  oblique  march. 

632.  The  object  of  the  oblique  step  is  to  gain  ground 
to  the  rigbt  or  left,  preserving  all  the  while  the  prim- 
itive direction  of  the  line  of  battle  ;  as  thus,  for  ex- 
ample: the  battalion,  departing  from  the  line  (sz), 
arrives  on  the  line  (xz)  parallel  to  (sz). 

633.  It  is  then  essential  that  the  corporals  in  the 
centre  of  the  battalion,  and  the  captains  of  compa- 
nies, should  follow  parallel  directions,  and  maintain 
themselves  at  the  same  height;  without  which  they 
will  give  a  false  direction  to  the  battaiion. 

634.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  exert 
themselves  to  prevent  the  files  from  crowding  ;  for, 
without  such  precaution,  the  oblique  march  cannot  be 
executed*  with  facility. 


sen  ):'L  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  143 


Article  Third. 

To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and 
to  align  it. 

635.  The  battalion  marching  in  the  line  of  battle, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

636.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
halt;  the  color-rank  and  general  guides  will  remain 
in  front ;  but  if  the  colonel  should  not  wish  immedi- 
ately to  resume  the  advance  in  line,  nor  to  give  a  gen- 
eral alignment,  he  will  command  : 

Color  and  general  guides — POSTS. 

637.  At  this  command,  the  color-rank  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  the 
captains  in  the  left  wing  will  shift  to  the  right  of  their 
companies. 

638.  If  the  colonel  should  then  judge  it  necessary 
to  rectify  the  alignment,  he  will  command  : 

Captains,  rectify  the  alignment. 

639.  The  captains  will  immediately  cast  an  eye 
towards  the  centre,  align  themselves  accurately,  on 
the  basis  of  the  alignment,  which  the  lieutenant  col- 
onel will  see  well  directed,  and  then  promptly  dress 
their  respective  companies.     The  lieutenant  colonel 


144  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

will  adiuoiiish  such  captains  as  may  not  be  accurate- 
ly on  the  aligiuuent  by  the  command:  Captain  of 
(such)  company,  or  captains  of  fsucii)  companies, 
move  up  or  fail  back. 

640.  But  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  the 
battalion  a  general  alignment,  either  parallel  or  ob- 
lique, instead  of  rectilyiug  it  as  above,  he  will  move 
some  jtaces  outside  of  one  of  the  general  guides  (the 
right  will  here  be  supposed)  and  caution  the  right 
general  guide  and  the  color-bearer  to  face  him,  and 
then  establish  them  by  signal  of  the  sword,  on  the 
direction  which  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  battalion. 
As  soon  as  they  shall  be  correctly  established,  the  left 
general  guide  will  place  himself  on  their  direction, 
and  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  major.  The  col- 
or-bearer will  carry  the  color-lance  perpendicularly 
between  his  eyes,  and  the  two  corporals  of  his  rank 
will  return  to  their  places  in  the  front  rank  the  mo- 
ment he  shall  face  to  the  colonel. 

641.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

J,  1.  Guides — On  the  Line. 


642.  At  this  command,  the  right  guide  of  each  com- 
pany in  the  right  wing,  and  the  left  guide  of  each 
company  in  the  left,  will  each  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  color-bearer  and  the  two  general  guides, 
face  to  the  color-bearer,  place  himself  in  rear  of  the 
guide  who  is  next  before  him  at  a  distance  equal  to 
the  front  of  his  company,  and  align  himself  upon  the 
color-bearer  and  the  general  guide  beyond. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-PART  V.  3  45 

643.  The  captains  m  the  right  wing  will  shift  to 
the  left  of  their  couipanies,  except  the  captain  of  the 
color-company,  wlio  will  remain  on  its  right,  but  step 
into  the  rear  rank ;  the  captains  in  the  left  wing  will 
shift  to  the  right  of  their  companies.  « 

644  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  promptly  rectify, 
if  necessary,  the  positions  of  the  guides  of  the  right 
wing,  and  the  major  those  of  the  other;  which  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command: 

2.  On  the  centre— Dress. 

645.  At  this  command,  the  companies  will  move 
up  in  quick  time  against  the  guides,  where,  having 
arrived,  each  captain  will  align  his  company  accord- 
ing to  prescribed  principles,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
aligning  the  color-company. 

646.  If  the  alignment  be  oblique,  the  captains  will 
take  care  to  conform  their  companies  to  it  in  con- 
ducting them  towards  the  line. 

647.  The  battalion  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

3.   Color  and  guides — POSTS. 

648.  At  this  command,  the  color  bearer,  the  gen- 
eral and  company  guides,  and  the  captains  in  the 
right  wing,  will  take'their  places  in  the  line  of  battle, 
and  the  color-bearer  will  replace  the  heel  of  the 
color-lance  against  the  right  hip. 

640.  If  the  new  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  be 
such  that  one  or  more  companies  find  themselves  in 
advance  of  that  line,  the  colonel,  before  establishing 
^he  general  guides  on  the  line,  will"  cause  such  com- 


14G  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION     PART  V 

panies  to  be  moved  to  the  rear,  either  by  the  back 
step,  or  by  first  facing  about,  according  as  thtre  may 
be  less  or  more  ground  to  be  repassed  to  bring  the 
companies  in  rear  of  the  new  direction. 

650.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  a  general 
alignment,  and  the  color  and  general  guides  are  not 
on  the  line,  he  will  cause  them  to  move  out  by  the 
command : 

J.   Color  and  general  guides — On  THE  LiNE. 

651.  At  this  command,  "the  color-bearer  and  the 
general  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  line,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  640. 

Article  Fourth. 


Change   of  direction   in   marching  in  line  of  battle. 

652.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  it  to  change  direction  to 
the  right,  he  will  command : 

].  Change  direction   to  the  right.      2.    March    (or 

double  quick — MARCH.) 

653.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will 
commence ;  the  color-rank  will  shorten  the  step  to 
fourteen  or  seventeen  inches,,  and  direct  itself  circu- 
larly to  the  right,  taking  care  to  advance  the  loft 
shoulder,  but  only  insensibly;  the  major  will  place 
himself  before  the  color-bearer,  facing  him,  and  so 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-PART  V.  147 

direct  his  march  that  he  may  describe  an  arc  of  a 
circle  neither  too  hirge  nor  too  small ;  he  will  also 
see  that  the  color-bearer  takes  steps,  of  fourteen  or 
seventeen  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

604.  The  right  general  guide  will  wheel  on  the 
right  captain  of  the  battalion  as  his  pivot;  the  left 
general  guide  will  circularly  march  in  the  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches  or  thirty-three  inches,  according 
to  the  gait,  and  will  align  himself  upon  the  color- 
bearer  and  the  right  general  guide. 

055.  The  corporal  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  bat- 
talion, will  take  steps  of  fourteen  or  seventeea 
inches,  and  will  wheel  to  the  right  by  advancini;  in- 
sensibly the  left  shoulder  ;  the  battalion  will  conform 
itself  to  the  movement  of  the  centre;  to  this  end,  the 
captain  of  the  color-company,  and  the  captain  of  the 
next  to  the  left,  will  attentively  regulate  their  march, 
as  well  as  the  direction  of  their  shoulders,  on  the 
three  centre  corporals.  All  the  other  captains  will 
regulate  the  directi(m  of  their  shoulders  and  the 
length  of  their  step  on  this  basis. 

656.  The  men  will  redouble  their  attention  in  order 
not  to  pass  the  line  of  captains. 

657^  In  the  left  wing  the  pace  will  be  lengthened 
in  proportion  as  the  file  is  distant  from  the  centre; 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  who  closes  the 
left  flank  of  the  battalion  will  take  steps  of  twenty 
eight  or  thirty-three  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

658.  In  the  right  wing  the  pace  will  be  shortened 
in  proportion  as  the  file  is  distant  from  the  centre; 
the  captain  who  closes  the  right  flank  will  only  slowly 


148  SCHOOL  OF  THE    BATTALION— PART  V. 

turn  in  his  person,  observing  to   yield  ground  a  little 
if  pushed. 

651).  The  colonel  will  take  great  care  to  prevent 
the  centre  of  the  battalion  from  describing  an  arc  of 
a  circle,  either  too  great  or  too  small,  in  order  that 
the  wings  may  conform  themselves  to  its  movement. 
He  will  see  also  that  the  captains  keep  their  com- 
panies constantly  aligned  upon  the  centre,  so  that 
there  may  be  no  opening  and  no  crowding  of  files. 
He  will  endeavor  to  prevent  faults,  and,  should  they 
occur,  correct  them  without  noise. 

C60.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  before  the  bat- 
talion, will  give  his  attention  to  the  same  object. 

661.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  direct  march 
to  be  resumed,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Forward.     2.  March 


662.  At  the  command  march,  the  color-rank,  the 
general  guides,  and  the  battalion  will  resume  the. 
direct  march  ;  the  major  will  immediately  place  him- 
self thirty  or  forty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the  colonel, 
placed  in  rear  of  the  centre,  who  will  establish  him 
by  signal  of  the  sword  on  the  perpendicular  direc- 
tion which  the  corporal  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion 
ought  to  pursue ;  the  major  will  inunediately  cause 
the  color-bearer,  if  necessary,  to  incline  to  the  right 
or  left,  so  as  to  be  exactly  opposite  to  his  file;  the 
color-bearer  will  then  take  two  points  on  the  ground 
between  himself  and  the  major. 

663.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  endeavor  to  ^ive 


SCHOOL  OF  THP:  battalion -part  v.  149 

to  the  color-company  and  the  next  on  the  left  a  direc- 
tion perpendicular  to  that  pursued  by  the  centre 
corporal ;  and  all  the  other  companies,  without  pre- 
cipitancy, will  conform  themselves  to  that  basis. 


Article  Fifth. 
To  inarch  in  retreat,  in  line  of  battle. 

664.  The  battalion  being  halted,  if  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  colonel  to  cause-it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will 
command: 

1.  Face  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  about — Face. 

665.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
face  about;  the  color-rank,  and  ^the  general  guides, 
if  in  advance,  will  take  their  places  in  line  ;  the  col- 
or-bearer will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  leading  ; 
the  corporal  of  his  file  will  step  behind  the  corporal 
next  on  his  own  right,  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass, 
and  then  step  into  the  front  rank,  now  rear,  to  re- 
form the  color-file;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  be- 
hind the  front  rank,  become  the  rear;  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  major  will  place  themselves  before  the 
rear  rank,  now  leading. 

666.  The  colonel  will  take  post  forty  paces  behind 
the  color-file,  in  order  to  assure  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel on  the  perpendicular,  who  will  place  himself  at  a 
like  distance  in  front,  as  prescribed  for  the  advance 
in  line  of  battle 

667.  If  the  battalion  be  the  one  charged  with  the 
direction,  the  colonel  will  establish  markers  in  the 


150  SCHOOL  f  F  THE  BATTALION— PART    V. 

manner  indicated,  No.  589,  except  that  tliey  will  face 
to  the  battalion,  and  that  the  first  will  be  placed  twen- 
ty-five paces  from  the  lieutenant  colonel.  If  the  mar- 
kers be  already  established,  the  officer  charged  with 
replacini?  them  in  succession  will  cause  them  to  face 
about,  the  moment  that  the  battalion  executes  this 
movement,  and  then  the  marker  nearest  to  the  bat- 
talion will  hasten  to  the  rear  of  the  two  others. 

6G8.  These  dispositionsbeingmade,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

3.  Battalion,  forirard. 

669.  At.  this  command,  the  color-bearer  will  ad- 
vance six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file  closers,  ac- 
companied by  the  two  corporals  of  his  guard  of  that 
rank,  the  centre  corporal  stepping  back  to  let  the 
color-bearer  pass;  the  two  file  closers  nearest  this 
centre  corporal  will  unite  on  him  bt  hind  the  color- 
guard  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment  for  the  line  of 
file  closers  ;  the  two  general  guides  will  place  them- 
selves  abreast  with  the  color-rank,  the  covering  ser- 
geants will  place  themselves  in  the  line  of  file  closers, 
and  the  captains  in  the  rear  rank,  now  leading;  the 
captains  in  the  left  wing,  now^  right,  will,  if  not  al- 
ready there,  shift  to  the  left  of  their  companies  now 
become  the  right. 

670.  The  colonel  will  then  command : 

4.  March  (or  doiible  quick— March.) 

671.  The  battalion  will  march  in  retreat  on  the 
same  principles  which  govern  the  advance  in  line  ;  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.    151 

centre  corporal  behind  the  color-bearer  will  march 
exactly  in  his  trace. 

672.  If  it  be  the  directing  battalion,  the  color-bear- 
er will  direct  himself  on  "the  markers,  w^ho  will,  of 
their  own  accord,  each  place  himself  in  succession 
behind  the  marker  most  distant,  on  being  approached 
by  the  battalion;  the  officer  charged  with  the  super-- 
intendence  of  the  markers,  will  carefully  assure  them 
on  tJie  direction 

67;?.  In  the  case  of  a  subordinate  battalion,  the 
color-bearer  will  mainj:ain  himself  on  the  perpendicu- 
lar by  means  of  points  taken  on  the  ground. 

674.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  and  major  will 
each  discharge  the  same  functions  as  in  the  advance 
in  line. 

675.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  on  the  outside 
of  the  file  closers  of  the  color-company,  will  also 
maintain  the  three  file,  closers  of  the  basis  of  align- 
ment in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction  :  the  other 
file  closers  will  keep  themselves  aligned  on  this  basis. 


Article  Sixth. 
To  halt  the  battalion   marching  in  retreat,  and  to  face 
it  to  the  front. 

676.  The  colonel   having  halted  the  battalion,  and 
Wishing  to  face  it  to  the  front,  will  command  : 

].  Face  to  llie  front.     2.  Battalion,  about — Face. 

677.  At  the  second  command,  the  color-rank,  gene- 


15'2  SCHOOL  OF  TFIE  BATTALION— PART   V. 

eral  guides,  captains,  and  covering  sergeants,  will  all 
retake  their  habitual  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the 
color-bearer  will  repass  into  the  front  rank. 

G78.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle  by 
the  front  rank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march 
it  in  retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.   Battalion,  right  about.     2.  MARCH. 

679.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  rear  and  move  off  at  the  same  gait  by  tlie  rear 
rank.     The  principles  prescribed  No.  6G9,  andfollow- 

-ing  will  be  carefully  observed". 

680.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion  to 
>^  march  again  by  the  front,  ho  will  give  the  same.cora- 

mands. 


Article  Seventh. 


Change  of  direction,  in  marching  in  retreat. 

681.  A  battalion  retiring  in  line  will  change  direc- 
tion by  the  connnands  and  means  indicated  No.  652 
and  following  ;  the  three -file  closers,  united  behind 
the  color  rank,  will  conform  themselves  to  the  move- 
ment of  this  I'ank,  and  wheel  like  it ;  the  centre  file 
closer  of  the  three  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  or 
seventeen  inches,  according  to  the  gait,  and  keeji  him- 
self steadily  at  the  same  distance  from  the  color- 
bearer;  the  line  of  file  closers  will  conform  themselves 
to  the  movement  of  its  centre,  and  the  lieutenant 
colonel  will  maintain  it  on  that  basis. 


•  I  ui.wMii  \i  I  ^""^^^'^fiti'^^^i^g'fmf 


53 


obstacle  only  covers  the  third  company,  the  colonel 
will  command : 


Third  company,  obstacle. 


68;3.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  third 
company  will  place  himself  in  its  front,  turn  to  it, 
and  command,  1.  Third  company,  by  the  left  flank,  to 
the  rear  into  column.  2.  Double  quick.  3.  March. 
He  will  then  hasten  to  the  left  of  his  company. 

6S4.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
face  to  the  left  in  marching;  the  two  left  files 
will  promptly  disengage  to  the  rear  in  double  quick 
time;  the  left  gtiide  placing  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
front  rank,  will  conduct  it  behind  the  fourth  compa- 
ny, directing  himself  parallelly  with  this  company; 
the  captain  of  the  third  will  himself  halt  opposite  to 
the  captain  of  the  fourth,  and  see  his  company  file 
past ;  when  its  right  file  shall  be  nearly  up  with  him, 
he  will  command,  I.  Third  company.  2.  By  the  right 
flank.  3.  March.  4.  Guide  right,  and  place  him- 
self before  the  centre  of  his  company. 


school  of  the  hatt alton— part  v.       153 
Article  Eighth. 

Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and  retreating. 

682.  The  battaliim  advancing  in  line  will  be  sup- 
posed to  encounter  an  obstacle  which  covers  one  or 
more  companies ;  the  colonel  will  cause  them  to 
ploy  into  column  at  full  distance,  in  rear  of  the  next 
company  towards  the  color,  which  will  be  executed 
in  the  following  manner.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the 
obstacle  only  covers  the  third  company,  the  colonel 
will  command : 


Third  company,  obstacle. 

683.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  third 
company  will  place  himself  in  its  front,  turn  to  it, 
and  couunand,  1.  Third  company,  by  the  left  flank,  to 
the  rear  into  column.  2.  Double  quick.  3.  March. 
He  will  then  hasten  to  the  left  of  his  company. 

6?4.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
face  to  the  left  in  marching;  the  two  left  files 
will  promptly  disengage  to  the  rear  in  double  quick 
time  ;  the  left  guide  placing  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
front  rank,  will  conduct  it  behind  the  fourth  compa- 
ny, directing  himself  parallelly  with  this  comj»any  ; 
the  captain  of  the  third  will  himself  halt  opposite  to 
the  captain  of  the  fourth,  and  see  his  company  file 
past ;  when  its  right  file  shall  be  nearly  up  with  him, 
he  will  command,  I.  Third  company.  2.  By  the  right 
flank.  3.  March.  4.  Guide  right,  and  place  him- 
self before  the  centre  of  his  company. 


154  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

685.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right,  preserving  the  same  gait,  but  the  mo- 
ment it  sliall  be  at  the  prescribed  distance,  its  cap- 
tain will  command : 

1.  ^uick  time.     2.  MARCH. 

686.  This  company  will  thus  follow  in  column  that 
behind  which  it  finds  itself,  and  at  wheeling  distance, 
its  right  guide  marching  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the 
captain  of  that  company. 

687.  As  soon  as  the  third  company  shall  have  faced 
to  the  left,  the  left  guide  of  the  second  will  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  his  company, 
and  maintain  between  himself  and  the  right  of  the 
fourth  the  space  necessary  for  the  return  into  line  of 
the  third. 

688.  The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Third  company,  foricard  into  line. 

689.  At  this  command,  the  captain  turning  to  his 
company,  will  add : 

1.  By  company,  right   half  ichcel.     2.  Double  quick. 

3.  March. 

690.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
take  the  double  quick  step,  and  execute  a  half  wheel ; 
its  captain  will  then  command,  ].  Forward.  2. 
March.  3.  Guide  left.  The  second  comn)and  will 
be  given  when  the  conipany  shall  have  sufficiently 
wheeled. 


'^■v 


••*♦ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALKN— PART   V.  155 

691.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
direct  itself  straight  forward  towards  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  retake  its  position  in  it  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  for  the  formation  forward  into  line 
of  battle. 

692.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  corers 
several  contiguous  companies  (the  three  companies 
on  the  right  for  example),  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Three  right  covipanics,  obstacle.  2.  By  the  left 
flank,  to  the  rear,  into  column.  3.  Double  quick — 
March. 

693.  At  the  tirst  command,  the  captains  of  the 
designated  companies  will  each  place  himself  before 
the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  as  to  the 
movement  about  to  be  executed. 

694.  At  the  command  march,  the  designated  com- 
panies will  face  to  the  left  in  marching,  and  imme- 
diately take  the  double  quick  step  ;  each  captain  will 
cause  the  head  of  his  company  to  disengage  itself  to 
the  rear,  and  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the 
head  of  the  front  rank ;  the  captain  of  the  third  com- 
pany will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
684  and  followiiig;  the  captains  of  the  other  com- 
panies will  conduct  them  by  the  flank  in  rear  of  the 
third,  inclining  towards  the  head  of  the  colum.n ;  and, 
as  the  head  of  each  company  arrives  opposite  to  the 
right  of  the  one  next  before  it  in  column,  its  captain 
will  himself  halt,  see  his  company  file  past,  and  con  , 
form  himself  for  facing  it  to  the  front,  in  marching, 
to  what  is  prescribed  No.  684,  and  following. 


156  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART   V. 

695.  When  the  last  company  in  column  shall 
have  passed  the  obstacle,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 


1.   Three  right  companies,  forward,  into  line. 

696.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  these 
three  companies,  .will  command.  By  company,  right 
half  tchcel.     The  colonel  will  then  add  : 

1.  Double  quick.     2.  MARCH. 

697.  At  this,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains  of 
the  three  companies,  each  company  will  conform  it- 
self to  what  is  prescribed  No.  690  and  following. 

698.  It  is  supposed,  in  the  foregoing  examples, 
that  the  companies  belonged  to  the  right  wing ;  if 
they  make  .part  of  the  other,  they  will  excute  the 
passage  of  an  obstacle  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples and  by  inverse  means. 

699.  When  flank  companies  are  broken  off  to  pass 
an  obstacle,  the  general  guide  on  that  flank  will  place 
himself  six  paces  in  front  of  the  outer  file  of  the  near- 
est company  to  him  remaining  in  line. 

700.  In  the  preceding  movements,  it  has  been  sup- 
posed tbat  the  battalion  was  marching  in  quick  time, 
but  if  it  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  and  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  several  contiguous  com- 
panies to  break  to  the  rear,  he  will  first"  order  the 
battalion  to  march  in  quick  time;  the  companies  will 
break  as  indicated  No.  692. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART   V.  157 

701,  When  the  movement  is  completed,  the  colo- 
nel will  order  the  double  quick  step  to  be  re^sumed. 
He  will  also  cause  the  battalion  to  march  in  quick 
time  when  he  shall  wish  to  bring  into  line  the  several 
companies  which  are  to  the  rear  in  column ;  the 
movement  will  be  executed  as  previously  indicated ; 
and  when  the  last  company  shall  have  nearly  comple- 
ted its  movement,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  double 
quick  step  to  be  resumed. 

702.  In  the  movement  of  a  single  company,  or  of 
several  companies  not  contiguous  to  each  other,  the 
battalion  will  continue  to  march  in  double  quick 
time,  but  in  these  cases  the  companies  which  are  to 
ploy  into  column,  or  re-enter  the  Hue,  will  increase 
the  gait. 


703.  In  the  march  in  -retreat,  these  several  move- 
ments will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  if 
the  battalion  marched  by  the  front  fank. 

704.  When  a  battalion,  advancing  in  line  of  battle, 
shall  be  obliged  to  execute  the  right  about  in  order 
to  retreat,  if  there  be  companies  in  column,  behind 
the  rear  rank,  these  companies  will  also  execute  the 
right  about,  put  themselves  in  march,  at  the  same 
time  with  the  battalion,  and  will  thus  precede  it  in 

I  the  retreat;  they  will  afterwards  successively  put 
I  themselves  into  line  by  the  oblique  step,  as  the  ground 
j  may  permit. 

705.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  retreat  in 
j  double  quick  time,  and  many  contiguous  companies, 

be  marching  before  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion, 


158  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

the  colonel  will  uot  change  the  gait  of  the  battalion 
in  causing  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 


706.  When  the  color-company  Bhall  be  obliged  to 
execute  the  movement  of  passing  an  obstacle,  the 
color-rank  will  return  into  line  at  the  moment  the 
company  shall  f  ice  to  the  left  or  right ;  the  major 
will  place  himself  six  paces  before  the  extremity  of 
the  company  behind  which  the  color  company  marches 
in  column,  in  order  to  give  the  step  and  the  direc- 
tion;  he,  himself,  first  tailing  the  step  from  the  bat- 
talion. 


707.  As  soon  as  the  color-company  shall  have  re- 
turned into  line,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard 
will  again  move  out  six  paces  in  front  of  the  battal- 
ion, and  take  the  step  from  the  major ;  the  latter  will 
immediately  place  himself  twenty  or  thirty  paces  in 
front  of  the  color-bearer,  and  face  to  the  colonel 
placed  behind  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  who  will 
establish  him  on  the  perpendicular ;  and,  as  soon  as 
he  shall  be  assured  on  it,  the  color-bearer  will  instant- 
ly take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and 
the  major. 

708.  It  is  prescribed,  as  a  general  rule,  that  the 
companies  of  the  right  wing  ought  to  execute  the 
movement  of  passing  obstacles  by  the  left  flank,  and 
the  reverse  for  the  companies  of  the  other  wing ;  but 
if  the  obstacle  cover  at  once  several  companies  of  the 
centre,  each  will  file  into  column  behind  that,  still  in 
line,  and  of  the  same  wing,  which  may  be  the  nearest 
to  it. 


-/J9. 


mmy"'-:^^.  i  -mmm^^ik^mmmmmmmmm —    '  ^m. 


nil  ^X 


JHIB 


b. 


1 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  159 

Article  Ninth. 
To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank. 

709.  When  a  battalion,  retiring  in  line,  shall  en- 
count»^r  a  d;'file  which  it  must  pass,  the  colonel  will 
halt  the  battalion,  and  face  it  to  the  front. 

710.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  in  rear  of 
the  left  flank,  ami  that  its  width  is  sufficient  to  give 
passage  to  a  column  by  platoon ;  the  colonel  will 
place  a  marker  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
file  closers  at  the  point  anuiud  which  the  subdivisions 
will  have  to  change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the 
defile;  he  wall  then  command: 

To  the  rear,  by  the  right  flank,  pass  the  defile. 

711.  The  captain  of  the  first  company  will  imme- 
diately command : 

1.  First  company,  right— Face.    2.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

712.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  company 
will  commence  the  movement;  the  first  file  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  march  to  the  rear  till  it  shall 
have  passed  four  paces  beyond  the  file  closers,  when 
it  will  wheel  again  to  the  right,  and  then  direct  it- 
self straight  forward  towards  the  left  fiank.  All  the 
other  files  of  this   company    will    come    to    wheel 


L 


-•^ • 


160  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

in  succession  at  the  same  place  where  the  first  had 
wheeled. 

713.  The  second  company  will  execute,  in  its  turn, 
the  same  movement,  by  the  commands  of  its  captain, 
who  will  give  the  command  March,  so  that  the  first 
file  of  his  company  may  immediately  follow  the  last 
of  the  first,  without  constraint,  however,  as  to  tak- 
ing the  step  of  the  first ;  the  first  file  of  the  second 
company  will  wheel  to  the  right,  on  its  ground ;  all 
the  other  files  of  this  company  will  come  in  succes- 
sion to  wheel  at  the  same  place.  The  following 
companies  will  execute,  each  in  its  turn,  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

714.  When  the  whole  of  the  second  company  shall 
be  on  the  same  direction  with  the  first,  the  captain 
of  the  first  will  cause  it  to  form,  by  platoons  into 
line,  and. the  moment  that  it  is  in  column,  the  guide 
of  the  first  platoon  will  direct  himself  on  the  marker 
around  whom  he  has  to  change  direction  in  order  to 
enter  the  defile. 

715.  The  second  company  will  contimie  to  march 
by  the  flank,  directing  itself  parallelly  with  the  line 
of  battle;  audit,  in  its  turn,  will  form  by  platoon 
into  line,  when  the  third  company  shall  be  wholly  on 
the  same  direction  with  itself. 

716.  The  following  companies  will  successively 
execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  se- 
cond, and  each  will  form  by  platoon  into  line,  when 
the  next  company  shall  be  on  the  same  direction  with 
itself. 

717.  The  first  platoon  of  the  leading  company  hav- 
ing arrived  opposite  to  the  marker  placed  at  the  en- 
trance of  the  defile,  will  turn  to  the  left,  and  the  fol- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  P.ATTALION-^PART   V.  161 

lowing  platoons  will  all  execute  this  movement  at  the 
same  point.  As  j;he  last  companies  will  not  be  able 
to  form  platoons  before  reaching  ttie  defile,  they  will 
so  direct  themselves,  in  entering  it,  as  to  leave  room 
to  the  left  for  this  movement. 


■jyS.  The  battalion  will  thus  pass  the  defile  by  pla- 
toon: and,  as  the  two  platoons  of  each  company 
shall  dear  it,  companies  will  be  successively  formed 
by  the  means  indicated,  school  of  the  company.  No' 
273,  and  following. 


719.  The  head  of  the  column  havlug  cleared  the 
defile,  and  having  reached  the  dist<ince  at  which  the 
colonel  wishes  to  re-form  line  faced  to  the  defile,  he 
may  cause  the  leading  company  to  turn  to  .the  left, 
to  prolong  the  column  in  that  direction,  and  Ihen 
form  it  to  the  left  iito  line  of  battle;  or  h'e  may  halt 
the  column,  and  form  it  into  lifse  of  battle  faced  to  the 
rear. 

■''720.  If  the  defile  be  in  the  rear  of  the  right  flank, 
it  will  be  passed  by  the  left ;  the  movement  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 
inverse  means. 

721.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  receive  the 
front  of  a  platoon,  it  will  be  passed  by  the  flank. 
Captains  and  file  closers  will  be  watchful  that  the 
files  do  not  lose  their  distiinces  in  marching.  Com- 
panies or  platoons  wijl  he  formed  into  line  as  the 
width  of  the  defile  may  permit,  or  as  the  companies 
shall  successively  clear  it. 
11* 


165  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART   V. 

ARTICLE  Tenth. 
To  march  by  the  flank. 

722.  The  colonel,  wisliiiig' the  battalion  to  march 
by  the  flank  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion.  2.  Right  {ox  left)— F ACF..     3.  Forward. 
4.  Warch  {i)v double  quick — March). 

723.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  and 
covering  sergeants  will  place  thcniselves  as  prescribed, 
Nos.  13«5  and  141,  school  of  the  company. 

724.  The  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  will 
place  hi'iiiself  to  the  left  and  by  the  side  of  the  last 
file  of  his  company,  covering  the  captains  in  file. 

725.  The  battalion  having  ta  fiice  by  the  left 
flank,  the  captains,  at  the  second  command,  will 
shitt  rapidly  to  the  left  of  their  companies,  and  each 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant  of 
the  company  preceding  his  own,  except  the  captain 
of  the  left  company,  who  will  place  himself  by  the 
side  of  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion.  The 
covering  sergeant  of  the  rioht  company  will  place 
himself  by  the  right  side  of  the  front  rank  man  of 
the  rearmost  file  pf  his  company,  covering  the  cap- 
tains in  file. 

726.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  step 
off  with  life;  the  sergeant,  placed  before  the  leading 
file  fright  or  left  in  front),  will  be  carefnl  to  pre- 
serve exactly  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and 


_^^ 


j^S^ 


rrTT 

rTTT 

rrrr 
rxrr 
cm 
r  i  1  n 

1.1  !  11 


1"  'i  v\..\ 

tunrD 

Li_j_j_j 


L-i     I     !   .1 

cxrp 

i   I  I,  I  I 

I     i     !    I,  I 

rrm 

I    I   !  1  I 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  163 

to  direct  himself  strai^fht  forward ;  to  this  end  he 
will  take  points  on  the  ground. 

727.  Whether  the  battalion  march  by  the  right  or 
left  flank,  the  lientenant  colonel  will  place  himself 
abreast  with  the  leading  file,  and  the  major  abreast 
with  the  cohir-file,  both'on  the  side  of  the  front  rank, 
and  about  six  paces  from  it.  ^ 

728.  The  adjutant,  placed  between  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  the  front  rank,  will  march  in  the  same 
step  with  the  head  of  the  battalion,  and  the  ser- 
geant major,  placed  between  the  major  and  the  color- 
bearer,  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  adju- 
tant. 

729.  The  captains  .and  file  closers  will  carefully 
see  that  the  files  neither  open  out,  -n(>r  dose  too 
much,  and  that  they  regain  insensibly  their  distances, 
if  lost. 

730.  The  colonel  wishing  the  battalion  to  wheel  by 
file,  will  command: 

1.  By  file  right  (or  left).    2.  March. 

731.  The  files  will  wheel  in  succession,  and  all  at 
the  place  where  the  first  had  wheeled,  in  conforming 
to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
company. 

732.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command : 

].  Battalion      2.  Halt,     3,  Frokt, 

733.  These  commands  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.   146. 


164  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-  PART  V. 

734.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  by  the  flank  and 
the  coUniel  should  wish  .to  cause  it  to  march  in  line, 
either  to  the  front  or  to  the  rear,  the  movements  will 
be  executed  by.the  commands  and  means  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  company. 

Article  Eleventh.  ' 

To  form  the  battalion  on  the  right  or  left,  by  file,  into 
line  of  battle. 

735.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  on  the  right  by 
file,  he  wnll  determine  the  line  of  battle,  and  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  will  place  two  markers  on  that  line,  in 
conformity  with  what  is  prescribed,  No.  4!  5. 

736.  The  head  of  the  battalion  being  nearly  up  with 
the  first  marker,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   On  the   right,    by  fie,   into  line.     2.  Maucii   (or 
double  quick — MaiichJ. 

737.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company 
will  form  itself  on  the  right,  by  file,  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company.  No. 
149  ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  first  file  will  rest  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  the  first 
marker ;  the  other  companies  will  follow  the  move- 
ment of  the  leading  company  ;  each  captain  will 
place  himself  on  the  line  at  the  same  time  with  the 
front  rank  man  of  his  first  file,  and  on  the  right  of 
this  mun. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  ]65 

738.  The  left  guide  of  each  company,  except  the 
leading  one,  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 
markers,  and  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  his  company, 
at  the  instant  that  the  front  rank  man  of  this  file  ar- 
rives on  the  line. 

739.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Gwir/cs— Posts. 


■  740.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  successive 
formation  of  the  battalion,  moving  along  the  front  of 
the  line  of  battle. 

741.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will,  in  succepsion,  as- 
sure the  direction  of  the  guides,  and  see  that  the  men 
of  the  front  rank,  in  placing  themselves  on  ttie  line, 
do  not  pass  it.  . 

742.  If  the  battalion  march  by  the  left  flank,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

Article  Twelfth. 

Changes  of  front. 

Change  of  front  perpendicularly  fortcard. 

743.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  itig  sup- 
posed to  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  a  change 
of  front  forward  on  the  right  company,  and  that  the 
angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new  positi(nis  be  a  right 
angle,  or  a  few  degrees  more  or  b'ss  than*  one  ;  he 
will  caus6  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the  new 
direction,  before  the  position  to   be  occupied  by  that 


16fi  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

company,  and  order  its  captain  to  establish  it  against 
the  markers. 

744.  The  captain  of  th'e  right  company  will  imme- 
diately direct  it  upon  the  markers  by  a  wheel  to  the 
right  on  the  fixed  pivot;  and  after  having  halted  it, 
he  will  align  it  by  the  right. 

745.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  Change  front  forward  on  first  company.  2.  By 
company,  right  half  lohcel.  3.  March  [or  double 
quick— M.A.Rcn'\. 

746.  At  the  second  command,  each  company  will 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company. 

747.  At  the  third,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the 
right  on  the  fixi3d  pivot;  the  left  guide  of  each  will 
place  him -elf  on  its  left  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  able 
to  pass  ;  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  that  the 
companies  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  com- 
mand :    , 


4.   Foricard.     5.  March.     6.  Guide  right. 

748.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  ceasing 
to  wheel  will  march  straight  forward  ;  at  the  sixth, 
the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right. 

749'.  The  right  guide  of  the  second  company  will 
march,  straight  forward  until  this  company  shall  arrive 
at  the  point  where  it  should  turn  to  the  right ;  each 
succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the  file  immediately 
before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel,  and  will 
march  in  the  trace  of  this  file  until  this  company  shall 


y^^ 


"H        "H 


^  4^ 


\' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.    167 

turn  to  the  right  to  move  upon  the  Hue;  this   guide 
will  then  inarch  straight  forward. 

750.  The  second  conipanj:  having  arrived  opposite 
to  the  left  file  of  the  finst,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to 
turn  to  the  right ;  the  right  guide  will  direct  him- 
self so  as  to  arrive  squarely  upon  the  line  of  battle, 
and  when  he  shall  be  at  three  paces  from  that  line, 
the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  HALT. 

751.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt ;  the  files  not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  will  come 
into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  on 
the  line  of  battle,  and  as  soon  -as  he  is  assured  in  tBe 
direcfion  by  the  lieutenant  colonel,  the  captain  will 
align  the  c(»miiany  by  the  right. 

752.  Each  following  company  will  conform  to  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

753.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — Posts. 


754.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  change  front  forward  on  the  first  com- 
pany, and  that  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new 
jjositions  be  a  right  angle,  he  will  cause  two  markers 
to  bo  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the  position 
to  be  occupied  by  that  company,  and  will  command  : 


168  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

I.  Change  front  forward  on  first  company.  2.  By 
company,  right  half  ichcel.  3.  March  [or  double 
quick— 'March^. 

755.  At  the  first  counnand,  the  captains  will  move 
rapidly  before  the  centre  of  their  respective  com- 
panies; the  captain  of  the  first  company  will  com- 
mand :  L  Right  turn  ;  2.  Quick  time ;  the  captains 
of  the  other  companies,  will  caution  them  to  wheel  tc 
the  right. 

75G.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  company 
will  turn  to  the  right  according  to  the  principl»^s  pre- 
scribed in  the  schotd  of  the  soldier,  No.  402;  its  cap- 
tain will  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the  markers,  and 
the  files  in  roar  will  promptly  come  into  line.  The 
captain  will  align  the  company  by  the  right.      • 

757.  'Each  of  the  oth(M*  companies  will  wheel  to 
the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot;  the  left  guides  will  place 
themselves  on  the  left  of  their  respecttve  comi)anies, 
and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  they  have  wheeled 
sufficiently,  he  will  command : 


4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.  Guide  right. 

758.  These  commands  will  be  executed  as  indica- 
ted No.  746  and  fidlowing. 

750.  The  colmiel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  change 
front  forward  on  the  eighth  company  according  to 
the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 


rr,     r.A.rrrT.ATTnN— PART    V.  169 


1 


«S1 


\ 


^JSSJiPe-.  ■■■'fxs•'i^ 


\ 


K 


\ 


^^•- 


\ 


-■■J 


-U 


, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  169 

Change  of  front  perpendicularly  to  the' rear. 

7G0.  Tho  colnnel  wishing  to  change  front  to  the 
rear  on  the  right  company,  will  impart  his  purpose  to 
the  captain  of  this  compau5^  The  latter  will  imme- 
diately face  his  company  about,  wheel  it  to  the  left 
on  the  fixed  pivot,  and  halt  it  when  it  sliall  be  in  the 
direction  indicated  to  him  \ij  the  colonel :  the  cap- 
tain will  then  fice  his  company  to  the  front,  and  align 
it  by  the  right  against  the  two  markers,  whom  the 
colonel  will  cause  to  be  establisl  ed  before  the  right 
and  left  files. 

76 J.  These  dispositions  bein^  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  Change  front  to  the  rear,  on  first  company.  2.  Bat- 
talion about — Face.  3.  By  company,  left  half 
wheel.     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

762.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
except  the  right,  will  face  about. 

763.  At  the  third,  the  captains,  whose  companies 
have  ficed  about,  will  each  place  himself  behind  the 
centre  of  his  company,  two  paces  from  the  front 
rank,  now  the  rear.  <* 

764.  At  the  fourth,  these  companies  will  w^heel  to 
the  left  on  the  fixed  pivot  by  the  rear  rank  :  the  left 
guide  of  each  will,  as  soon  as  he  is  able  to  pass,  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  of  his  company, 
now  become  the  right ;  and  when  the  colonel  shall 
judge  that  the  companies  have  sufficiently  wheeled, 
he  will  command : 


SCHOOL  OF  T[IE  BATTALION-PART  V. 


5.  Forward.     6.  March.    7.  Guide  left. 

765.  A-t  the  sixth  command,  the  companies  will 
cease  to  wheel,  march  straight  forward  towai'ds  the 
new  line  of  battle,  and,  at  the  seventh,  take  the  touch 
of  the  elbow  towards  the  left. 

766.  The  guide  of  each  company  on  its  right  flank, 
become  left,  will  conform  himself  to  the  principles 
prescribed.  No.  748. 

767.  The  second  company,  from  the  right,  having 
arrived  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  first,  will  turn  to 
the  left;  the  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  arrive 
parallelly  with  the  line  of  battle,  cross  that  line,  and 
when  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  shall  be  three 
paces  beyond  if,  the  captain  will  command :  1.  Se- 
cond company ;  2.  Halt. 

768.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt;  the  files  which  may  not  yet  be  in  line  with  the 
guide,  will  promptly  C(  me  into  it ;  the  captain  will 
cause  the  company  to  face  about,  and  then  align  it  by 
the  right. 

769.  All  the  other  companies  will  execute  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  each  as  it  succes- 
sively arrives  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  company  that 
precedes  it  on  the  new  line  of  battle. 

770.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides— Vo'^TS. 

771.  The  colonel  will  cause  a  cliiuige  of  front  on 
the  left  company  of  the  battalion  to  the  rear,  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  171 

772.  In  changes  of  front,  the  colonel  will  give  a 
general  superintendence  to  the  movement. 

773.  The  lieutenant  colonel  -will  assure  the  direc- 
tion of  the  cuides  as  they  successively  move  out  on 
the  line  of  battle,  conforming  himself  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  succesisive  formations. 


Remarks  on  changes  of  front. 


774.  When  the  new  direction  is  perpendicular,  or 
nearly  so,  to  that  of  the  battfllion,  the  companies  ought 
to  make  about  a  half  trhrel  (the  eighth  of  the  circle^ 
before  march'ing  straight  forward;  but  when  those 
two  lines  are  obliqne  to  each  other,  the  smaller  the 
angle  which  they  form,  the  less  ou<rht  the  companies 
to  wheel.  It  is  for  the  colonel  to  judge,  according  to 
the  angle,  the.precise  time  when  he  ought  to  give  the 
command  march,  after  the  cautiiui  foricard,  and  if  he 
cannot^catch  the  exact  moment,  the  word  of  execu- 
tion should  rather  be  given  a  little  too  soon,  than  an 
instant  too  late. 


775.  When  the  old  and  the  new  lines  form  an  angle 
of  forty-five  or  fewer  degrees,  the  colonel  will  find  it 
necessary  to  arrest  the  wheel  of  the  companies  when 
the  marching  flanks  shall  have  taken  but  a  few  paces, 
or,  it  may  be,  have  butdisenaaged,  respectively,  from 
the  fixed  pivots  of  the  next  companies;  and  in  all  such 
cases,  the  companies  will  arrive  so  nearly,  parallel  to 
the  new  line,  as  to  be  able  to  align  themselves  upon 
it  without  the  intermediate  turn  to  the  rifiht  or  left ; 


172  SCH'OL  OF  THE  EATTAUoN— PART  V. 

to  execute  the  movement  under  either  circumstance 
supposed,  the  colonel  will  command:' 

Oblique   change  of  front,  forward,   (or  to  the  rear)  on 

(such  compavTj.) 

Article  Thirteenth. 

To  ploy  the  hattalion  into  column  doubled  on  the  centre. 

776.  This  movement  consists  in  ploying  the  eorres- 
pondin«[  companies  of  the. right  and  left  wings  into 
'column  at  compnny  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  in 
rear  of  the  tw©  centre  companies,  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed,  Article  Third,  Part  Second,  of 
this  School. 

777.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  form  the  double  col- 
umn at  company  distance,  fthe  battalion  being  iuliue 
of  battle,)  will  command: 

1.  Double  column,  at  half  distance.  2.  Battalion,  in- 
wards—Face.  3.  March  (or  double  quick  — 
MarchJ. 

778.  At  the  first  commAnd,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  in  front  of  thdr  respective  com- 
panies ;  the  captains  of  the  two  centre  companies  will 
caution  them  to  stand  fast,  and  the  other  Ciiptains 
will  caution  their  C(mipanies  to  face  to  the  left  and 
right,  respectively.  The  covering  sergeants  will  step 
into  the  front  rank. 


H^.l. 


Fi^.3 


to  execi 
supposct 

Oblique 


To  ploy  . 

776.  T 
pondin*: 
'column  a 
rear  of  tl 
principle! 
this  Scho 

777.  T. 
mv.n  at  c« 
of  battle, 

1.  Double 
wards— 
March 

778.  A1 
them  solve 
panics;  tl 
caution  t, 
will  cauti 
right,  resi 
into  the  fi 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  173 

779.  At  the  second  command,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies  will  stand  fast ;  the  others  of  the  right 
wing  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  others  of  the  left 
wing  will  face  to  the  right ;  each  captain  whose  com- 
pany has  faced,  will  hasten  to  break  to  the  rear  the 
two  files  at  the  head  of  his  company ;  the  left  guide  of 
each  right  company,  and  the  right  guide  of  each  left 
company,  will  each  place  himself  at  the  head  of  its 
front  rank,  and  the  captain  by  the  sidB  of  kis  guide. 

780.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies,  which  are  to  form  the  first  division,  will 
stand  fast;  the  senior  captain  ot  the  two  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  the  division,  and  com- 
mand :  Guide  right ;  the  junior  captain  will  place 
himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies, 
and  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company  will  place  him- 
self in  the  front  rank  on  the  left  of  the  division,  as 
soon  as  he  shall  be  able  to  pass*. 

781.  All  the  other  companies,  conducted  by  their 
captains,  will  step  off  with  life  to  arrang;e  themselves 
in  column  at  company  distance,  each  company  behind 
the  preceding  one  in  the  colunm  of  the  same  wing,'so 
that,  in  the  right  wing,  the  third  may  be  next  beldnd 
the  fourth,  the  second  next  to  the  third,  and  so  on  to 
the  right  company;  and,  in  the  left  wing,  the  sixth 
may  be  next  behind  the- fifth,  the  seventh  next  to  ihe 
sixth,  and  so  oa  to  the  left  company  of  the  battalion. 

782.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  two  wings 
will  unite   into   divisions  in  arraiigiiig   themselves  in 

1  column  ;  an  instant  before  the  union,  at  the  centre  of 
Ithe  column,  the  left  guides  of  right  companies  will 
mass  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  and  each  captain  will 


174  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

command:    I.  Such  company ;    2.  Halt;    3.  FiiONT. 

783.  At  the  second  command,  which  shall  be  given 
at  the  instant  of  union,  each  company  will  halt ;  at 
the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front.  The  senior  captain 
in  each  division  will  place  himself  on  its  right,  and 
command,  Right — UiiESS,  and  the  junior  captain  will 
place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  com- 
panies. The  division  being  aligned,  its  chief  will 
comnuuul  Fkont,  and  take  his  position  two  paces  be- 
fore its  centre. 

784.  The  c(dumn  being  thus  formed,  the  divisions 
will  take  the  respective  denominations  ()fy?>if,  sccort</, 
third,  &(i.,  according  to  position  in  the  column,  be- 
ginning at  the  front. 

785.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  who,  at  the  second 
command  given  by  the  colonel,  will  have  placed  him- 
self at  a  little  more  than  company  distance  in  rear  of 
the  right  guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the 
right  guides  on  the  direction  as  they  successively  ar- 
rive, by  placing  himself  iu  their  rear. 

786.  The  music  will  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

787.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  form  the 
double  column  at  company  distance  without  halting 
the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Double  column  at  half  distance.     2.    Battalion,  by 

the  right  and  left  flanks. 

3.  Maucii  (or  double  quick— March). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  t.  175 

788.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company;  the  cap- 
tains of  the  fourth  and  fifth  will  caution  their  com 
panies  to  march  straight  forward  ;  the  other  captains 
will  caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  right  and 
left. 

789.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward; 
the  senior  captain  will  place  himself  before  the  cen- 
tre of  his  division  and  command,  Guide  right;  the 
junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  be- 
tween the  two  companies.  The  left  guide  of  the  fifth 
company  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank  of  the  division.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of 
elbows  to  the  right.  The  color  and  general  guides 
will  retake  their  places.  The  three  right  companies 
will  face  to  the  left  and  the  three  left  companies  will 
face  to  the  right.  Each  captain  will  break  to  the  rear 
two  files  at  the  head  of  his  company ;  the  left  guides 
of  the  right  companies,  and  the  right  guides  of  the 
left  companies,  will  each  place  himself  at  the  head 
of  the  front  rank  of  his  company,  and  the  captain  by 
the  side  of  his  guide. 

790.  The  third  and  sixth  companies  will  enter  the 
column  and  direct  themselves  parallelly  to  the  first 
division.  Each  of  the  other  companies,  will  in  like 
manner,  place  itself  behind  the  company  of  the  wing 
to  which  it  belongs,  and  -will  be  careful  to  gain  as 
much  ground  as  possible  towards  the  head  of  the 
column. 

791.  The  corresponding  companies  of  each  wing 
will  unite  into  divisions  on  taking  their  positions  in 
colunm,  and  each  captain,  the  instant  the  head  of  his 


176         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

company  arrives  at  the  centre  of  tlie  column,  will 
command,  1.  Such  coiitpany  by  tin.,  right  ( or left.)Jla?ik. 
2.  March.  The  senior  captaiii  of  the  two  con>panies 
will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  divi- 
sion, and  conmiand,  Guide  right;  the  junior  captain 
will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two 
companies.  The  two  companies  thus  formed  into  a 
division  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  rijL'ht, 
and  when  each  division  has  gained  its  proper  distance, 
its  chief  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

792.  When  the  battalion  presents  an  oddnuniberof 
companies,  the  foi-mation  will  be  made  in  like  manner, 
and  the  con)pany  on  either  flank  which  shall  lind  it- 
self without  a  corresponding  one,  will  place  itself  at 
company  distance  behind  the  wing  to  which  it  be- 
longs. 

793.  The  double  column,  closed  in  mass,  will  be 
formed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the 
same  commands,  substituting  the  indication,  closed  in 
mass,  for  that  of  at  half  distance. 

794.  The  double  column  never  being  formed  when 
two  or  more  battalions  are  to  be  in  one  general  col- 
umn, it  will  habitually  take  the  guide  to  the  right, 
sometimes  to  the  left,  or  in  the  centre  of  the  colunm; 
iu  the  last  case,  the  command  will  be,  guide  centre. 
The  column  will  march  and  change  direction  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed  for  a  simple  column 
by  division. 

795.  The  double  column  at  company  distance  will 
be  closeu  in  mass,  ul",  if  "Snii  mass,  will  take  half  dis- 
tance, by  the  commands  and  means  indicated  for  a 
simple  column  by  divisi(»u. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION--  PART  V. 


Deployment  of  the  double  column,  faced  to  the  front. 

796.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  deploy  the  double  col- 
umn, will  place  a  marker  respectively  before  the  right 
and  left  files  of  the  first  division,  and  a  third  before 
the  left  file  of  the  right  company,  same  division ;  which 
being  done,  he  will  cause  the  two  general  guides  to 
spring  out  on  the  alignment  of  the  markers  a  little  be- 
yond the  points  at  which  the  respective  flanks  of  the 
battalion  ought  to  rest;  he  will  then  command: 

].     Deploy  column.     2.     Battalion  outicards — Face. 
3.  March  [or  double  quick — March]. 

797.  The  column  will  deploy  itself  on  the  two  com- 
panies jit  its  head,  acccft'ding  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  deployment  of  columns  in  mass.  The 
captains  of  these  companies  will  each,  at  the  command 
march,  place  himself  on  the  right  of  his  own  company, 
and  align  it  by  the  right;  the  captain  of  the  fourth 
will  then  place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  and  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  «t  the  moment 
the  captiiiii  of  the  third  shall  come  to  its  left  to 
align  it. 

798.  The  deployment  being  ended  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

r99.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  the  fire 
ito  comn-ence  pending  the  deployment,  he  will  give  an 
12^ 


178         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PAJIT  V. 

order  to  that  effect  to  the  captains  of  the  fourth  and 
fifth  conipaiiies,  and  the  fire  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  438. 

800.  The  battalion  being  in  double  column  and  in 
march,  if  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  cause  three  markers  to 
be  posted  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  the  head  (►f 
the  column  shall  arrive  near  the  markers,  he  will 
command : 


1.    Deploy  column.     2.  Battalion  by  the  right  and  left 
flanks.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


801.  The  column  will  deploy  on  the  two- leading 
companies,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for 
the  deployment  of  a  close  column,  No.  533  and  fol- 
lowing; at  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  halt  it,  and  the  captains  of  the  fourth 
and  fifth  companies  will  align  their  companies  by  the 
right. 

802.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  colonel  to  deploy  the  column  and  to  continue  to 
march  in  the  order  of  battle,  he  will  nA  cause  mark- 
ers to  be  established  at  the  head  of  the  column.  The 
movemQut  will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and 
means  indicated  No.  800,  observing  what  follows.  At 
the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
command,  Quick  time.  At  the  command  march,  the 
first  division  will  continue  -to  march  in  quick  time; 
the  colonel  will  command,  Guide  centre.  Ttie  captains 
of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  the  color,  and  the 


aCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  V.         179 

men,  will  immediately  conform  to  the  principles  of  the 
march  in  line  of  battle.  The  companies  will  take  the 
quick  step  by  the  command  of  their  captains,  as  they 
successively  arrive  in  line.  The  movement  comple- 
ted, the  colonel  may  cause  the  battalion  to  march 
in  double  quick  time. 

To  form  the  dooble  column  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to 
the  right  or  left. 

803.  The  double  column,  being  at  company  distance 
and  at  a  halt,  may  beT»trmed  into  line  of  battle  foced 
to  the  right  or  left ;  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
form  it  faced  to  the  right,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Right  into  line  icheel,  left  companies  on  the  right 
into  line.  2.  Battalion,  guide  right.  3.  March 
Cor  double  quick — March  j. 

804.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company;  the  right 
companies  will  be  cautioned  that  they  will  have  to 
wheel  to  the  right  into  line,  the  left  companies  that 
they  will  have  to  march  straight  forward. 

805.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  of  the 
fourth  company  will  place  himself  briskly  on  the  di- 
rection of  the  right  guides  of  the  column,  face  to  them, 
and  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  last  files  of  his  com- 
pany when  in  line  of  battle ;  the  lieuteuant  colonel  will 
assure  him  in  that  position. 

806.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
all  the  captains,  the  right  companies  will  form  to  the 


180  BCIIOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

right  into  lino  of  battle,  the  left  companies  will  put 
themselves  in  march  in  order  to  form  on  the  right  in- 
to line  of  battle;  these  formations  will  be  executed  by 
the  means  indicated  No.  391  and  following,  No.  416 
and  following ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the 
guides  of  the  left  wing  on  the  line  of  battle  as  they 
successively  come  upon  it. 

807.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command : 


1.  Right  into  line  wheel.  2.  Left  companies  on  the 
right  into  line.  3.  Battalion  guide  right.  4.  March 
Cor  double  quick— lslAB.en). 


808.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  promptly  before  the  centre  of  his  company  ; 
the  right  companies  will  be  cautioned  that  they  will 
have  to  wheel  to  the  right,  and  the  left  companies 
that  they  will  have  to  form  on  the  right  into  line. 

809.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated,  the 
right  companies  will  form  to  the  right  into  line,  and 
the  left  companies  on  the  right  into  line.  These 
formations  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  Nos.  402, 
417,  and  following, 

810.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  the  battal- 
ion forward,  at  the  moment  the  right  companies  have 
completed  the  wheel,  he  will  command : 

5.     Forward.  6.  MARCH  for  double  quick — MARCH ). 


SCHOUL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V,  181 

811.  At  the  command  forward,  the  captains  of  the 
right  companies  will  command,  Qidck  time.  At  the 
command  inarch,  the  ri^ht  companies  will  cease  to 
wheel  and  march  straight  forward.  The  colonel  will 
then  add: 

7.     Guide  centre. 

812.  The  movement  of  the  left  companies  will  be 
executed  in  double  quick  time  as  presci-ibed  above, 
and  as  they  arrive  on  the  line  each  captain  will  cause 
his  company  to  march  in  quick  time. 

813.  The  column  may  be  formed  faced  to  the  left 
into  line  of  battle  according  to  tlie  same  principles. 

814.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass  instead  of  at 
co^iipany  distance,  these  movements  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  principh's  prescribed  Nos.  417,  502, 
and  510. 

Remark  on  the  deployment  of  the  double  column. 

815.  The  depth  of  the  double  column,  at  company 
distance,  being  inconsiderable,  closing  it  in  mass,  if 
at  a  halt,  in  order  to  deploy  it,  may  be  dispensed 
with  ;  but  if  it  be  in  march,  it  will  be  preferable  to 
cause  it  so  to  close,  in  halting,  before  deploying. 

81C.  The  Rouble  column  will  be  deployed  habitual- 
ly on  the  centre  companies,  but  the  colonel  may  some- 
I  times  deploy  it  on  any  interior  company,  or  on  the 
first  or  eighth  company. 


i 


182  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V 


Articlf  Fourteenth. 

Dispositions  Against    Cavalry. 

817.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  company,  at 
full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  square,  he  will  first 
cause  divisions  to  be  formed  ;  which  being  done,  he 
will  command  : 

1.   To  form  square.     2.    To  half  distance  close  column. 
3.  March  or  (douhle  quick— Marcw^. 

818.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  close 
to  company  distance,  the  second  division,  taking  its 
distance  from,  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  division. 

819.  At  the  moment  of  halting  the  fourth  division, 
the  file  closers  of  each  company  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed, passing  by  the  outer  flank  of  their  companies 
will  place  themselves  two  paces  before  the  front  rank 
opposite,  to  their  respective  places  in  line  of  battle, 
and  face  towards  the  head  of  the  column. 

820.  At  the  commencement  of  the  movement,  the 
major  will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  column 
abreast  with  the  first  division  ;  the  buglers  formed 
in  two  ranks  will  place  themselves  at  platoon  distance, 
behind  the  inner  platoons  of  the  second  division. 

821.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
may,  according  to  circumstances,  put  the  column  in 


/y/- 


£4^, 


T-    ■   -    IT'        -P 

'';ODD 

DO  □     0   0  □  0   OO; 

"H 

U                P 

;d  q  a 

0  Q  D    DO  qoq; 

U.J                   |- 

4              R   •  "  ->▼ 

loo  ^ 

-  J  0    o  a  o  o  «. 

'^ 

H                   ^- 

Fiel' 


Fii.2. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  183 

march,   or  cause  it  to  form  square ;  if  he  wish  to  do 
the  latter,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Form  square.     2.  Right  and  left  into  line,  icheel. 


822.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel, 
facing  to  the  left  guides,  and  the  major,  facing  to  those 
of  the  right,  will  align  them,  from  the  front,  on  the 
respective  guides  of  the  fourth  division,  who  will 
stand  fast,  holding  up  their  pieces,  inverted,  perpen- 
dicularly ;  the  right  guides,  in  placing  themselves  on 
the  direction,  will  take  their  exact  distances. 

t523.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  f^jst;  all  the  captains 
of  the  second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves 
before  the  centres  of  their  i^spective  companies,  and 
caution  tliem  that  they  will  have  to  wheel,  the  right 
companies  to  the  right,  and  the  left  companies  to  the 
left  into  line  of  battle. 

824.  The  color-bearer  will  step  back  into  the  line 
of  file  closers,  opposite  to  his  place  in  line  of  battle, 
and  will  be  replaced  by  the  corporal  of  his  file,  who 
is  in  the  rear  rank,  the  corporal  of  the  same  file  who 
is  in  the  rank  of  file  closers  will  s]^ep  into  the  rear 
rank. 

S'2.").  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  command  : 
1.  Fourth  division,  forward ;  2.  Guide  /e/if,  and  place 
himself  at  the  same  time  two  paces  outside  of  its  left 
fluik. 


184  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

826.  These  dispositions  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 


March  [or  doiihle  quick — March]. 

827.  At  this  command,  brisldy  repeated,  the  first 
division  will  stand  fiist;  but  its  right  file  will  face  to 
the  right,  and  its  left  file,  to  the  left. 

828.  The  companies  of  the  second  and  third  divi- 
sions will  wheel  to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  and 
the  bnglers  will  advance  a  space  equal  to  the  front  of 
a  company. 

829.  The  fourth  division  will  close  up  to  form  the 
square,  and  when  it  shall  have  closed,  its  chief  will 
halt  it,  face  it  about,  and  align  it  by  the  rear  rank 
upon  the  guides  of  the  division,  who  will,  for  this  j^r- 
pose,  remain  faced  to  the  front.  The  junior  captain 
will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front, 
and  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company  will 
place  himself  behind  him  in  the  front  ranli,  become 
rear.  The  file  closers  will,  at  the  same  time,  close 
up  a  pace  on  the  front  rank,  and  the  outer  file  ou  each 
flank  of  the  division  will  face  outwards. 

830.  The  square  being  formed, .  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

Guides— FosTS. 

831  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and 
fourth  divisions,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  enter  the 
squai-e. 

8.32.  The  captains  whose  companies  have  formed  to 
the  right  into  line,  will  remain  on  the  left  of  their  com- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V  185 

panies;  tlie  left  guide  of  en  eh  of  those  companies 
will,  in  the  rear  rank,  cover  his  captain,  and  the  cov- 
ering sergeant  of  each  will  place  himself  as  a  file 
closer  behind  the  right  file  of  his  company. 

833.  The  field  and  staff  will  entev  the  square,  the 
lieutenant  colonel  placing  himself  behind  the  left,  and 
the  m;ijor  behind  the  right  of  the  first  division. 

8.34.  If  the  battalion  present  ten,  instead  of  eight 
companies,  the  fourth  division  will  -make  the  same 
movements  prescribed  above  for  the  second  and  third 
divisions,  and  the  fifth,  the  movements  piescribed  for 
the  fourth  division. 

835.  A  battalion  ought  never  to  present,  neav  the 
enemy's  cavalry,  an  odd  company.  The  odd  com- 
pany, under  that  circumstance,  ought,  when  the  bat- 
talion is  under  arms,  to  be  consolidated,  for  the  time, 
with  the  other  companies. 

836.  The  fronts  of  the  squai-e  will  bo  designated  as 
follows :  the  first  division  will  always  be  the  first 
front  ;  the  last  division,  the  fourth  front  ;  the  right 
companies  of  the  other  divisions  will  form  the  second 
front ;  and  the  left  companies  of  the  same  divisions 
the  third  front. 

837.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  company,  at 
full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  in  march,  when  the 
cohtnel  shall  wish  to  form  square,  he  will  cause  this 
movement  to  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means 
indicated,  No.  817. 

838.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  close 
to  company  distance,  as  is  prescribed.  No.  278.  When 
the  chief  of  the  fourth- division  shall  command  Quick 
march,  the  file  closers  of  this  division  will  place  them 
selves  befoz'e  the  front  rank. 


186         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  . 

839.  The  mrijor  and  the  buglers  will  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  820. 

840.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  Right   and  left   into  line,  icheel 

3.  March. 

841.  .At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  halt ;  all  the  captains  of  the 
second  and  third  divisions  will  rapidly  place  them- 
selves before  the  centres  of  their  respective  compa- 
nies, and  caution  them  that  they  will  have  to  wheel, 
the  right  companies  to  the  right,  and  the  left  compa- 
nies to  the  left  into  line.  Xhe  chief  of  the  fourth  di- 
vision will  caution  it  to  continue  its  march,  and  will 
hasten  to  its  left  flank.  At  the  third  command,  brisk- 
ly repeated,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  halt 
his  division  and  align  it  to  the  left,  the  outer  files  will 
face  to  the  right  and  left,  the  rest  of  the  movement 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  828  and  following. 

842.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major,  at  the 
command  march,  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed, 

No.  822. 

843.  If  the  battalion,  before  the  square  is  formed, 
be  in  double  column,  the  two  leading  companies 
will  form  the  first  front.,  the  two  rear  companies 
the  fourth  ;  the  other  companies  of  the  right  half 
battalion  will  form  the  second,  and  th(»se  of  the  left 
half  battalion  the  third  front. 

844.  The  first  and  fourth  fronts  will  be  command- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  187 

ed  by  the  chiefs  of  the  first  aud    fourth  divisions  ; 
each  of  the  other  two  by  its  senior  captain. 

845.  The  commander  of  each  front  will  place  him- 
self four  paces  behind  its  present  rear  rauk,  and  will 
be  replaced  momentarily  in  the  command  of  his 
company  by  the  next  in  rank  therein, 

846.  If  the  cohimn  be  at  full  distance,  instead  of 
at  company  distance,  as  has  been  supposed,  the 
square  will  be  formed  in  the  manner  prescribed,  No. 
8J7  or  838,  and  following  ;  and  the  dispositions  indi- 
cated, Nos.  819  and  820,  will  be  executed  at  the 
command  form  square. 

847.  If  the  column  by  division,  whether  double  or 
simple,  be  in  mass,  and  the  colonel  shill  wish  to  form 
it  into  square,  he  will  first  cause  it  to  take  company 
distance  ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command  : 


1.    To  form  square.     2.  By   the  head  of  column,  take 
half  distance. 


848.  The  divisions  will  take  half  distance  by  the 
means  indicated,  No.  324,  and  following.  What  is 
prescribed.  No.  820,  will  be  executed  as  the  first  and 
second  divisions  are  put  in  motion. 

849.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  the  moment 
the  third  division  shall  have  its  distance.     As  soon  as 

4he  column  is  halted,  the  dispositions  indicated.  No. 
819,  will  be  executed,  and  when  these  are  com- 
pleted, the  colonel  may  proceed  to  form  square. 


188         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.     - 

850.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  he  will  also,  in 
the  first  place,  cause  company  distance  to  be  taken, 
and,  for  this  purpose,  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  By  the  head  of  column,  take 
half  distance.  3.  March  [or  double  quick — 
March]. 

851.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescrib- 
ed, No.  330,  and  following.  What  is  prescribed.  No. 
820,  will  be  executed  as  the  first  and  second  divi- 
sions are  put  in  motion. 

8521.  The  colonel  will  proceed  to  form  square  the 
moment  the  third  division  shall  have  its  distance ; 
at  th'  command  form  square, the  dispositions  indica- 
ted. No.  819,  will  be  executed.  If  it  be  intended 
merely  to  dispose  the  column  for  square,  the  colonel 
will  not  halt  the  column  until  the  last  division  has 
its  distance. 

853.  In  a  simple  column,  left  in  front,  these  sev- 
eral movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means  ;  but  the  fronts 
of  the  square  will  have  the  same  designations  as  if 
the  right  of  the  column  were  in  front,  that  is,  the 
first  division  will  constitute  the  first  front,  and  thus 
of  the  other  subdivisions. 

854.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  dis- 
tance less  than  thirty  paces,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  Imchl  front,  forward.    2.  March. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  189 

855.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  advance  be  made 
by  the  first  front,  the  chief  of  this  front  will  com- 
mand : 


1.  First  division,  forward.     2.  Guide  centre. 


856.  The  chief  of  the  second  fiiout  will  face  his 
front  to  the  left.  The  captains  of  the  companies  com- 
posing this  front  will  place  themselves  outside,  and 
on  the  right  of  their  left  guides,  who  will  replace 
them  in  the  front  rank ;  the  chief  of  the  third  front 
will  tace  his  front  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  in 
this  front  will  place  themselves  outside,  and  on  the 
left  of  their  covering  sergeants :  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
front  will  face  his  front  about,  and  command  :  1. 
Fourth  division,  forward.  2.  Guide  centre.  The  cap- 
tain who  is  in  the  centre  of  the  first  front,  will  be 
charged  with  the  direction  of  the  march,  and  will  re- 
gulate himself  by  the  means  indicated  in  the  school 
of  the  company,  No.  89. 

857.  At  the  command  march,  the  square  will  put 
itself  in  motion  ;  the  companies  marchiifg  by  the  flank 
will  be  careful  not  to  lose  their  distances.  The  chief 
of  the  fourth  division  will  cause  his  division  to  keep 
constantly  closed  on  the  flanks  of  the  second  and 
third  fronts. 

853.  This  movement  will  only  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

859.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  in 
rear  of  the  file  of  direction  in  order  to  regulate  the 
march. 


190        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

860.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  halb  the  square, 
he  will  command: 


1.  Battalion,     2.  Halt. 

861.  At  the  second  command,  the  square  will 
halt ;  the  fourth  front  will  face  about  immediately, 
and  without  further  command  ;  the  second  and  third 
fronts  will  face  outwards ;  the  captains  of  companies 
will  resume  their  places  as  in  square. 

862.  In  moving  the  square  forward  by  the  se- 
cond, third,  or  fourth  fronts,  the  same  rules  will  be 
observed. 

863.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  greater 
distance  than  thirty  paces,  be  will   command : 

1.  Form  column. 

864.  The  chief  of  the  first  front  will  command : 
1.  First  division  forward.  2.  Guide  left. 

865.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  cau- 
tion it  to  stand  fast ;  the  commander  of  the  second 
front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  left,  and  then  com- 
mand. By  company,  hy  file  left.  The  commander  of 
the  third  front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
then  command,  By  company,  by  file  right.  At  the 
moment  the  second  and  third  fronts  face  to  the  left 
and  right,  each  captain  will  cause  to  break  to  the 
rear  the  two  leading  files  of  his  company. 


.^AT 


ccr  ^^  „  L  o>.  W* 


xzim 


Fig.  I. 


Yie^f 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.    191 

86Q.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

3.  March  (or  double  rjuick— March). 

867.  At  this  command,  the  first  front  will  march 
forward ;  its  chief  will  halt  it  when  it  shall  have  ad- 
vanced a  space  equal  to  half  its  front,  and  align  it  by 
the  left. 

86d.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  second 
and  third  fronts  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  left  and 
right,  and  march  to  meet  each  othe>  behind  the  cen- 
tre of  the  first  division,  and  the  moment  they  unite, 
the  captain  of  each  company  will  halt  his  company 
and  face  it  to  the  front.  The  division  being  re-form- 
ed, its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left. 

869.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  cause 
it  to  face  about :  its  file  closers  will  remain  before 
the  front  rank. 

870.  The  column  being  thus  ro-formed,  the  colonel 
may  put  it  in  march  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed. No.  164,  and  following  ;  the  right  guides  will 
preserve  company  distance  exactly  as  the  directing 
guides. 

871.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form 
square,  he  will  give  the    commands   indicaied.  No. 

•840. 

872.  To  cause  the  square  to  march  in  retreat  a 
distance  greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will^ 

I  first  cause  column  to  be  formed  as  indicated  No.* 
863 ;  and  when  formed,  he  will  cause  it  to  face  by 
the  rear  rank  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command: 

1.   To  march   in  retreat.     2.  Face   by  the  rear  rank. 
3.  Battalion,  about — Face. 


192  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

873.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the 
iuterior  divisions  will  place  themselves,  passing  by 
the  outer  flanks  of  their  respective  companies,  be- 
hind the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line  of 
battle ;  the  file  closers  of  the  other  divisions  will 
stand  fast. 

874.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
about;  each  chief  of  divisicm  will  place  liimself  be- 
fore its  rear  rauk,  become  front,  passing  through 
the  interval  between  its  two  companies;  the  guides 
will  step  into  the^rear  rank,  now  front. 

875.  The  column  being  thus  disposed,  the  colonel 
may  put  it  in  march,  or  cause  it  to  form  square  as  if 
it  were  faced  by  the  front  rank.  The  squai-e  being 
formed,  its  fronts  will  preserve  the  same  designations 
they  had  when  faced  by  the  front  rank. 

876.  The  battalion  being  in  square  by  the  rear 
rank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  re- 
treat or  in  advance,  a  distance  less  than  thirty  paces, 
he  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  854  and 
following ;  otherwise,  he  will  re-form  the  column 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  863  by 
marching  forward  the  fourth  front. 

877.,  If  the  square  is  to  be  marched  to  the  front  a 
distance  greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will 
face  the  column  by  the  front  rank ;  to  this  end,  he 
will  command : 

].   To  inarch  in  advance.      2.  Face  by  the  fronl  rank. 

3.  Battalion  about— FxQVL. 


/J^. 


P6^ 


*^^i^S^ 


^% 


KiiSS 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PAR-T  V.  1  93 

878.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  873 
I      aad  following. 
i  870.  If  the  column  be   marching  in  advance,  and 

the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  wiil 

command : 

1.  To  march  in  retreat.     2.  Battalion  right  about. 
3.  March  or  (double  guide — March.) 

880.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of 
the  secand  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves 
rapidly  before  the  front  rank  of  their  respective  di- 
visions. At  the  comnunul  vu/rrh,  "the  colnmn  will 
face  about  and  move  of^  to  the  rear ;  the  chiefs  of  di- 
visi<nis  and  the  guides  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  874. 

881.  If  the  colnmn  bo  marching  in  retreat,  and 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  advance,  he  will 
command  : 

1.    To  march  in  advance.     2-  Battalion  rightabout. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — MArch.) 

882.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of 
the  second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves 
before  the  rear  rank  of  their  respective  divisions;  at 
the  third,  the  column  will  face  by  the  front  rank. 


To  reduce  the  square. 


883.  The  colonel  wishing  to  break  the  square  wiH 
command : 

1.  Reduce    square.     2.  March    for    double    quick — 
March.) 
13* 


.;Ji-r  -  i^--'.«,v 


194  SCHOOL  OF-THt:  BATTALION— PART  V.     " 

884.  This  raoveraeiit  will  be  executed  in  the  nmn- 
ncr  iiurif-atetl,  Nt).  863  niul  following  ;  but  the  file 
closers  of  the  fourth  front  will  place  themselves  be- 
hitid  the  rear  rant  the  ununeiit  4t  faces  about ;  the 
field  and  t^taff,  the  cohu-bearer  and  bu^'lers,  will,  at 
the  sttine  time,  return  to  their  places  in  column. 

To  form  square  from  line  of  hnillc. 

885.  A  battalion  deployed,  may  be  forpied  into 
square  in  a  direction  either  parallel  or  perpendicular 
to  the  line  of  battle. 

886.  In  the  first  ca«e,  tI^JD  colonel  will  cau-^e  the 
battalion  to  bieak  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the 
right  or  left,  and  then  clof^e  the  column  to  half  die- 
taTice,  as  indicated,  No.  817,  and  following. 

887.  1)1  the  second  case,  he  will  ploy  the  battalion 
into  simj^lc  column  by  division  at  half  distance  in  rear 
of  the  right  or  left  division,  or  into  column  doubled  on 
the  centre. 

888.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  upon  one  of 
the  flank  divisions,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Column  at  half  distance  by 
division.  11  On  the  first  (oi  fifurth)  divisioJt.  4, 
Battalion  right  (or  left) — Face.  5.  March  Cor 
double  quick — March.  ) 

889.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the'principles  prescril>ed  No.  119  and  following. 

890.  If  the  battalion  be  nmrching  in  line  of  battle, 
and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to   form  square  in  a  direc- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V  105 

tion  perpendicular  to  the  Ihie  of  battle,  he  will  com- 
ma lul  : 

1.  To  form  sqtiare.  2.  On  the  first  (or  fourth 
dimsion,  form-  column.  3.  Battalion  by  the  right 
(or  bft)  flank.  4.  MARCH  (or  double  quick— 
March.) 

891.  This  movement  will  be  exeeuted  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  ploj-ing  a  column  by 
division  at  half  distance,  No.  150.  The  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  halt  his  division  at  the  command 
march. 

8i)2.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column,  the 
colonel  will  command : 

1''.   To  form  square.      2..  Double  column  at    half  dis- 
■*  tancc.      3.  Battalion   imcards  -Face.     4,  March 
(or  double  quick — March.) 

893.  This  mctvement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
No.  778  and  following. 

894.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into 
double  column  to  form  square,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Form  double  column.  3. 
Battalion  by  the  right  and  left  flanks.  4.  MARCH 
(or  double  quick— Mahcu.) 

895.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
No.  788.  TJie  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  halt 
his  division  at  the  command  march. 


196  :-;eilOOL  OF  THE  BATTALI"N— PART  V. 

Observations  relative  to   the  formation   of  squares  in 
two  ranl.s. 

89i),  When  tte  colonel  sbull  judge  it  proper  to  have 
a  reserve,  this  reserve,  in  a  column  of  three  divisiwis 
v^'ill  be  formed  of  tlio  inner  pliitoons  of  the  second 
division.  The  second  division  vs'ill,  in  this  case  close 
to  platoon  distance  on  the  first  division.  When,  the 
square  is  formed,  the  reserve  platoon  will  move  for- 
ward a  distance  nearly  e4uul  to  a  platoon  front. 

897.  In  re-forming  column,  the  first  division  will 
move  forward  platoon,  instead  of  company  distance. 

898.  If  the  column  be  formed  of  four  divitiiions,  the 
inner  platoons  of  the  third  division  w-ill  compose  the 
reserve  ;  then  in  re-forming  column  the  first  divi- 
sion will  conform  to  the  gene'ral  rule,  and  the  chief 
of  the  third,  as  soon  as  his  division  is  formed,  will 
close  it  to  platoon  distance  on  the  second  division. 
The  colonel  may,  if  necessary,  form  the  reserve  of 
the  entire  third  division.  In  this  case  the  movement 
will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner. 

899.  If  the  column  be  at  full  distance,  when  it  shall 
close  at  the  command  to  form  square  to  half  distance, 
the  chief  of  the  third  division  will  cause  four  files  to 
break  to  the  rear  from  the  right  and  left  of  his  di- 
vision :  the  guides  will  close  upon  the  outer  files 
remaining  in  line  and  the  left  guide  will  march  ex- 
actly in  the  trace  of  the  file  immediately  in  front  of 
him.  This  division  will  then  close  in  mass  on  the 
second  division ;  and  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division 
will  close  to  half  distance  on  the  same  division. 


SCHOOL  OF  TifE  BATTALION -PART  V.  197 

900.  At  the  command  form  square,  the  chief  of  the 
reserve  divisiou  will  comuiand,  1.  Tliird  division, 
foncanL  2.  Guide  centre ;  at  thi.*!  comuiand,  the 
guides-  on  the  flanks  will  fall  into  th^  line  of-  file 
closers.  At  the  command  march,  the  reserve  wiil 
mave  forward  the  distance  of  a  company  froat.  When 
ljalti''d  its  chief  will  cause  the  platoons  to  be.  doubled, 
and  for  this  purpose  will  command : 

i.   On  the  centre  double  platoons.     2.  March. 

901.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
will  place  themselves  in  front  of  the  centre  (»f  their 
respective  platoons  ;  the  chief  of  each  outer  platoon 
will  face  his  platoon  towards  the  centre,  and  cause 
to  break  to  the  rear  two  files  from  the  left  or  right. 
At  the  command  march,  the  outer  platoons  will 
direct  their  march  so  as  to  doubje  on  the  centre 
platoon  at  the  distance  of  four  paces ;  their  chiefs 
will  alifi;n  these  outer  platoons  on  the  centre,  and 
the  files  previously  broken  to  the  rear  will  come  into 
line. 

902.  If  the  column  be  -it  half,  instead  of  full  dis- 
tance,  the  colonel,  bef<u'e  forming  squjsre,  will  order 
the  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  to  move 
forwaid  their  divisions  as  presetibed  No.  809. 

903.  If  the  column  be  closed  In  mass,  at  the  com- 
mand fo  form  square,  the  chief  of  the  third  division 
will  break  four  files  to  the  rear  from  each  of  the 
flanks  as  prescribed  No.  899. 

904.  The  colonel  will,  halt  the  column  as  soon  as 
the  second  division  shaM  have  gained  its  distance 


193  .^Critrct.1,  OF  THE- BATI\AL10N— PART  V. 

905.  If  thf  colonel  shall  wish  the  column  to  con- 
tinue niJirching  iit  the  conniiniul,  by  the  head  of 
cofuinn  tnkr,  ft/i/f  dhtfincc,  the  chief  of  the  j'e.serve 
division  will  give  his  cdutionmy  eon>inands  in  sufR- 
cie  ,t  time  to  place  his  division  in  motion  sinuilfa- 
neously  with  the  one  wiiich  precedes  it.  The  chief 
of  the  fourth  division  will  give  the  command  march 
at  the  instant  tliere  is  company  distance  between  his 
division  and  the  second. 


906.  When  the  colonel  shall  vv'ish  to  re- form  the 
column,  at  the  command  form  cohivin,  the  chief  of 
the  third  division  will  coiumaud,  l\)rm  division;  at 
this  couimand,  th»^  ciiiefs  Of  the  outer  platoons  which 
have  doubled  ii^rear  of  the  centre  platocms,  will  give 
the  commands  and  make  the  preparatory  movements 
for  deploying  on  the  centre  platoons,  which  will 
be  executed  at  the  conniiand  march  given  by  the 
colonel  and  briskly  repeated  by  the  chief  of  this  di- 
vision. The  division  being  re-formed,  the  chiefs  of 
the  oiiter  platoons  will  retake  their  places  in  column, 
and  the  chief  of  this  division  will  again  cause  four 
files  from  each  of  its  flunks  to  break  to  the  rear. 

907.  If  before  the  formation  of  the  square,  the 
column  had  been  left  in  front,  it  would  be  formed  by 
the  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. *  The  second  division,  in  this  case,  would  Ibrm 
the  reserve. 

908.  The  ccdumn  being  formed,  if  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  face  Tt 
by  the  rear  rank.  The  files  of  the  third  division 
broken   off  to  the   rear,  w-ill    face   about  with  the 


SCHOOL  OF -THE  BATTAtrtON— PART  V.  -        199 

battalion,  and  when  tlie-column  is  put  in  motion,  \vill 
march  in  front  of  the  rear  rank.  But  shcmM  the  col- 
onel wish  to  r.e form  the. square,  he  will  cause  the  bat- 
talictn  to  face  by  the  front  rank. 

909.  If  the  battalion  i>e  in  line,  instead  of  in  col- 
umn, tlie  chief  of  the  reserve  division  will  bring 
it  into  column  in  such  ufmnner  that  there  nuiy  be  a 
dista-nce  of  only  four  paces  between  this  division  and 
the  one  which  is.  to  be  inimedhitely  ia  front  of  it ; 
and  when  this  division  is  halted  and  alij^nrd,  its 
chief  will  cause  tb^  usual  nuuiber  of  files  t<)  be  brokeu 
to  the  rear.  The  chief  of  the  division  which  should 
occupy  in-colunm  a  position  immediately  in  re?ir  of 
the  reserve 'division  will,  on  entering  the  column, 
take  a  distance  of  twelve  paces  between  it  and  the 
division  established  immediately  in  front  of  the  re- 
serve division. 

Squares  in  four  ranks. 

910.  If  the  square  formed  in  two  ranks,  according 
to  the  preceding  rules,  should  not  be  d^^emed  suffi- 
ciently strong,  the  colonel  may  cause  the   square  to 

be  ftnaed  in  four  ranks. 

911.  The  battalion  being  m  column  by  company  at 
full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the 
Coloivel  shall  wish  to  form  square  in  four  ranks,  he 
will  first  cause  divisions  to  be  formed,  which  being 
executed,  he  will  command  :. 

1.     To  form  square  in  four  rankc      2.     To  half  dis- . 
tance,  close  column.     3.  March  (or  double  quick  - 
March.) 


•200  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

912.  At  the  fust  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
diviBion  will  caution  the  rigbt  company  to  face  to 
the  left,  and  the  left  company  to  face  .to  the  right. 
The  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  caution  their 
divisions  to  move  forward. 

913.  At  the  command  vnirrh,  the  rij^ht  company  of 
the  first  divission  will  form  into  four  ranks  on  its  left 
file,  and  the  left  company  info  four  ranks  on  its  right 
file.  •  The  fitrmation  ended,  the  chief  of  this  division 
will  align  it  by  the  left. 

914.  The  other  divisions  will  move  forward  and 
double  their  files,  marching  ;  the  right  company  of 
each  division  will  double  on  its  left  file,  and  the  left 
company  on  its  right  file.  The  formation  completed, 
each  chief  of  division  will  command,  Guide  left. 
Each  chief  will  halt  his  division  when  it  shall  have 
tiie  distance  of  a  company  front  in  four  ranks  from 
the  preceding  one,  counting  from  its  I'ear  I'nnk,  and 
will  align  his  division  by  the  left.  At  the  instant  the 
fourth  division  is  halted,  the  file  clo|ers  will  move  ra- 
pidly before  its  front  rank. 

915.  The  colonel  will  form  square,  re-form  column, 
and  reduce  «quare  in  four  i-anks,  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means  as  prescribed  for  a  battalion  in  tvvo 
ranks. 

91C.  If  the  square  formed  in  four  ranks  be  reduced 
and  at  a  halt,  and  the  eoh»nel  shall  wish  to  form  the 
battalion  into  two  ranks,  -he  will  command  : 

1.    In  two  ranks,  undouhh  files.     2.     Battalion  out- 
icards— Face.    ?>.  March. 

917.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  step 
before  the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  arid 


SCEIOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  201 

those  on  their  right  will  caution  ttiem  to  face  to  the 
right,  and  those  on  the  loft  to  face  to  the  left. 

918.  At  the  second,  command,  the  battalion  will 
face  to  the  right  and  left. 

919.  At  the  command  iiiaich,  each  company  will 
uudonble  its  files  and  re-form  into  two  ranks  as  indi- 
cated In  the  school  of  the  company  No.  376  and  fol- 
lowing. Each  captain  will  halt  his  company  and  face 
it  to  the  front.  The  formation  completed,  each  chief 
of  division  will  align  his  division  by  the  left. 

920.  If  the  colnran  be  in  march,  wHh  divisions 
formed  in  four  ranks,  and  the  colonel  shall  \vish  to  re- 
form them  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command:" 

1.   Guide  centre.     2.  In  two  ranks y  tindouhlc  files.     3. 
March. 

921.  The  captain,  placed  in  the  centre  of  each  di- 
vision, will  contmue  4'  march  straight  to  the  front, 
as  ^^ill  also  the  left  file  of  the  right  company,  and  the 
right  file  of  the  left  company.  Each  company  wiH 
then  be  re-formed  into  two  ranks,  as  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  company. 

922.  The  battalion  being  fornaed,  into  two  ranks, 
the  colonel  will  command.  Guide  left  (or  right.) 

923.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the 
flank  divisions,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Column  at  half 
distance.,  by  division'  3.  On  tJie  first  {ov  fourth) 
division.  4.  Battalion,  right  (or  left)  Face.  5. 
March  (or  double  quick — March.) 


202  SCHOOL  OF  THE  T?ATTALI'>>f_PART  V. 

924.  At  the  second  coinmaTKl,  each  chief  of  division 
will  pl;u-e  himself  bi'fore  the  centvo  of  his  division, 
and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right. 


925.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  right  guide  oflhe 
first  division  will  remain  faced  to  th.e  frbnt,  the  bat-, 
talion  will  face  to  the  right. 


92fi.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four 
men  of  tlie.tirst  division  will  face  to  the  front,  remain- 
ing doubled.  All  the  other  files  of  four  men  will 
step  oir  together,  and  each  in  succession  will  close  up 
to  its  proper  distance  on  the  file  preceding  it,  and 
face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  When  the  last 
file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will  com- 
mand, Left — Dress. 


927.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column  in 
the  same  manner  as  with  a  battalion  in  two  ra^iks. 
observing  what  follows  ;  the  chiefs  of  division,  in- 
stead, of  allowing  their  divisions  to  file  past  them  on 
entering  the  column,  will  continue  to  lead  them,  and>^ 
as  each  divisi(m  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with  the  right 
guide  of  the  first  divisiion,  its  chief  will  halt  the  right 
guide,  who  will  immediately  face  to  the  front ;  the  first 
file  of  four  men  will  also  halt  at  the  same  time  and 
face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The  second  file 
will  close  on  the  first,  and  when  closed,  halt,  and  face 
to  the  fr(»nt,  remaining  doubled.  All  the  other  files 
will  execute  successively  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  second,  Whenihe  last  file  shall  have 
closed,  the  chief  of  division  will  command,  Left— 
Diiiiss. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  203 

''z"^.  If  the  bftttiilion  be  in  iiiorch,  the  coloifel  will 

•;iU)Mnd  : 

1.  lo  firm  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  On  the  first  di- 
tisioh,.  fjrm  column.  3.  Battalion,  by  the  right 
rank.    4.  March  (or  double  qxiick—MMicii.) 

029  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  divi- 
iSK  II  wifl  step  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division 
a'.-d  c;iution  it  to  face  by  the  right  flank.  The  chiet 
ol  ilu>  first  division  will  caution  his  covering  sergeant 
to  halt,  and  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

0:30.  At  the  command  march,  \\ie  battalion  \^»illface 
to  the  right ;  the  covering  sergeant  of  tl.e  first  divi- 
sion will  halt  and  remain  fticed  to  the  front,  the  first 
division  will  then  form  into  four  ranks  as  heretofore 
])rescribed.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column 
in  the  same  manner  as  if  the  movement  had  taken 
place  from  a  halt. 

9;}1.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  a  perpen- 
dicular square  in  four  ranks,  by  double  column,  he 
will  command: 

J.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Double  column, 
al  half  distance.  3.  Battalion  inicards — Face.  4. 
March  [or  double  quick— lsl\\\cn.'\ 

982.  At  the- second  commtind,  the  captains  of  com- 
panies will  place  themselves  before  the  centres  of 
their  respective  companies,  and  caution  those  on  the 
right  to  face  to  the  left,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face 
to  the  right.  The  captain  of  the  fifth  company  will 
caution  his  covering  sergeant  to  stand  fast. 


204  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

933.  At  the  third  couimaud,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  I'ft  and  right;  at  the  coinniand  march,  the  left 
file  of  tlie  fourth,  and  the  right  file  of  the  fifth  com- 
pany, will  face  to  the  front,  remaining  donbled.  '  The 
fourth  company  will  close  puccrssivel^'hy  file  of  fours 
on  the  left  file,  and  the  fifth  c-ompany,  in  like  manner, 
on  the  right  fih^ ;  the  files  will  face  to  the  front,  re- 
maining doubled.  Tlie  formation  completed,  the  chief 
of  division  will  command,  Right  dress.  The  junior 
captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  betWeeuthe 
two  companies. 


934.  The  other  companies  will  close  as  prescribed 
for  the  double  c<dumn  in  two  ranks,  observing  what 
follows  :  each  captain  will  halt  the  leading  guide  of 
his  company  the  nu»ment  the  head  of  his  ctmipany  ar- 
rives on  a  line  with  the  centre  of  the  column.  In  the 
right  companies,  the  left  guides  will  step  into  the  line 
of  file  closers,  and  the  left  file  of  four  men  will  face 
immediately  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled,  and  by 
the  side  of  the  right  guide  of  the  left  company.  The 
companies  will  each  form  into  four  ranks,  as  pre- 
scribed No.  92(i,  the  right  companies  on  the  left  file, 
and  the  left  companies  on  the  right  file.  The  fi)rnia- 
tion  completed,  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself 
between  the  two  companies,  and  the  senior  will  com, 
mand.  Right  dress. 


93.5.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the   colonel  will 
command : 


205 

louble 
anks. 


place 

JCOttl- 

?m  to 

ice  by 
y  will 


i.  fifth 

0  the 

1  cpm- 
aioyie- 
yas  at 


3n  the 
le  will 


vision 


•  colo- 
ion  ill 
before 
le  left, 
t,  face 
xly  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALI   N— PART  V.  205 

I.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Form  doiihle 
column.  3.  Battalion  by  tke  right  and  left  flanks. 
4.  March  Cor  dovhle  qitick — March  J 

936.  At  the  second  comTnaiTd,the  captains  will  place 
themselves  betore  the  centres  of  their  respective  com- 
panies, and  those  on  the  right  will  caution  them  to 
face  by  the  left  flank,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  by 
the  right  flank  ;  the  captain  of  the  fifth  company  will 
caution  his  covering  sergeant  to  halt,  and  remain 
faced  to  the  front. 

937.  At  the  coiiimand  marcft,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies  will  halt.  The  |jattalion  will  face  to  the 
left  and  right ;  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  fifth  com- 
pany will  halt  and  remain  faced  to  the  front^the  move- 
ment will  then  be  executed  as  if  the  battalion  ^Yas  at 
a  halt. 

Oblique  squares. 

938.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the  oblique  square,  he  will 
comuiand  : 

1.    To  form  oblique  square.     2.   On  the  first  division 

form  column. 

939.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel will  trace  the  alignment  of  the  first  division  in 
the  following  manner :  he  will  place  himself  before 
and  near  the  right  file  of  this  division,  face  to  the  left, 
march  twelve  paces  along  the  front  rank,  halt,  face 
to  the  right,  march  twelve  pac«8  perpendicularly  to 


206  8(;iIOOL  (JF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

the  front,  halt  again,  face  to  the  right,  and  immedi- 
ately i)laee  a  marker  at  this  point.  The  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  right  company  will  step,  at  the  same 
time,  before  its  right  file,  faec  to  the  left,  and  conform 
the  line  of  his  shonlder»t(»  that  of  the  shoulders  of  the 
marker  established  by  the  lieutenant  coFonel.  These 
two  markers  being  established,  the  lieut^enant  colo- 
nel will  place  a  third  marker  on  the  same  alignment, 
at  the  point  where   the  left  of  the  division  will  halt. 

940.  The  chiefs  of  divifsion  will  place  themselves  in 
front  of  the  centres  of  their  divisions;  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  immediately  establish  it  by  a  wheel 
to  the  right  on  a  fixed*  ]»ivot,  against  the  markers, 
and  align  it  by  the  left.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  divi- 
sions will  cautuin  them  to  face  to  the  right.  The  colo- 
nel vpill  then  command : 

3.  Battalion  right — Face.       4.    MARCH   (or   double 
quick — March.) 

941.  The  three  rear  divisions  will  direct  their 
march  so  as  to  place  themselves  at  half  distance  from 
each  other,  and  in  the  rear  of  the  first  division,  as 
previously  indicated,  observing  what  follows  : 

945.  The  chief  of  the  second  division,  instead  of 
breaking  the  headmost  files  to  the  rear,  will  break 
them  to  the  front,  and  at  the  command  -utarc/i,  will 
conduct  his  division  towards  the-point  of  entrance  into 
the  column  Arrived  at  this  point,  he  will  halt  in  his 
own  person,  cause  his  division  to  wheel  by  file  to  the 


.?'^T 


Fk 


I  aaocaoooDOoo 


oo  coonDODono 


OOnO    DDODDDDC 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.        207 

right,  instructing  the  ri^ht  guide  to  direct  himself 
paraiJelly  to  the  firsi  division  ;  and  as  soon  as  tiie  left 
file  has  passedv  its  chief  will  halt  the  division,  and 
align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  divisions  will  break  to 
the  rear,  but  slightly ;  each  will  eutei:  the  coluuui  as 
prescribed  for  the  second,  and  the  moment  the  bat- 
talion is  ployed  iuto  column,  the  colonel  will  cause 
it  to  form  square. 

94  5.  The  formation  of  a  battalion  intoobliqne  square 
on  the  left  division,  will  bo  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means.  f 

944.  Should  the  battalioi^be  in  march,  the  colonel 
willfirst  cause  it  to  halt. 


945.  In  the  preceding  example,  the.  battalion  was 
supposed  to  be  deployed;  but  if  it  be  already  formed 
in  column,  the  desired  obliquity  will  be  established 
by  causing  it  to  change  direction  by  the  flank;  to 
this  end,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    To  form    oblique  square.      2.  Change  direction  by 
the  right  (or  left) /lank. 

946.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  trace  the  new  direction  in  the  following  manner: 
he  will  place  before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  head- 
most division,  two  markers,  and  a  third  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  first  two,  on  the  side  of  the  change  of 
direction,  and  at  twelve  paces  from  the  iiank  of  the 
colunm.  He  will  then  place  himself  before  the  third 
marker,  march  twelve  paces  perpendicularly  to  the 


/ 

208  SCHOaL  OP  THE  BATTALION    PART  V. 

front,  halt,  and  finish  tracing  the.  new  direction  in  the 
manner  indicated,  No.  S>;il>. 

947.  The  cokmel  will  then  ooninaand  : 

3.  Battalion  right  for  lcft)—Y.\CE.     4.  March    (or 
double  quick — March.  ) 

948.  The  change  of  direction  having  been  executed, 
the  colonel  will  cause  the  square  to  be  formed. 

949.  Should  the  column  be  iu  march,  the  colonel 
will  first  cau.se  it  to  halt. 

930.  Obli([no  squares  in  fDur  ranks,  will  be  execu- 
ted by  the  same  meaus,  and  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  the'formatiou  of  .squares  iu  four 
ranks. 

951.  Whether  the  battalion  be  ployed  into  simple 
or  double  column,  the  particular  dispositions  for  the 
formation  of  the  square  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed No.  819  and  following.  The  division  which  is 
to  form  the  rear  of  the  column,  will  be  closed  in  mass, 
and  as  soon  as  it  is  aligned,  the  major  will  rectify  tlie 
position  of  the  ij.uides  on  the  side  of  the  column  op- 
posite to  the  direction. 

952.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  merely  to  pre- 
pare for  square,  he  will  in  all  formations  with  that 
view  substitute  the  command  prepare  for  square  in 
place  6i  to  form,  sqiiare,  and  in  that  case,  the  last  divi- 
sion will  enter  the  column  at  company  distance. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  of  squares. 

953.  It  is  a  general  principle  that  a  column  by  com- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  Y.  200 

pany,  which  is  to  bQ  formed  inio  square,  will  first 
form  divisions,  and  close  to  half  distance.  Neverthe- 
less, if  it  find  itself  suddenly  threatened  by  cavalry 
without  sufficient  time  to  form  divisions,  the  colonel 
will  cause  the  column  to  close  to  platoon  distance  and 
then  form  square  by  the  commands  and  means  which 
have  been  indicated ;  the  leading  and  rearmost  com- 
panies will  conform  themselves  to  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  divisions  in  those  positions.  The  other 
companies  will  form  by  platoon  to  the  right  and  left 
into  line  of  battle,  and  each  chief  of  platoon,  after 
having  halted  it,  will  place  himself  on  the  line,  as  if 
the  platoon  were  a  company,  and  he  will  be  covered 
by  the  guide  in  the  rear  rank. 

954.  Abattalion  in  column  at  full  distance,  having 
to  form  square,  will  always  close  on  the  leading  sub- 
division ;  and  a  column  closed  in  mass,  will  always, 
for  the  same  purpose,  take  distances  by  the  head. 
In  either  case,  the  second  subdivision  should  be  care- 
ful, in  taking  its  distance,  to  reckon  f^om  the  rear 
rank  of  the  subdivision  in  front  of  it. 

955.  If  a  column  by  company  should  be  required 
to  form  square  in  four  ranks,  the  doubling  of  files  will 
always  take  place  ou  the  file  next  the  guide. 

956.  When  a  column,  disposed  to  form  square,  shall 
be  in  march,  it  will  change  direction  as  a  colunm  at. 
half  distance  ;  thus,  having  to  execute  this  movement, 
the  column  will  take  the  guide  on  the  side  opposite 
to  that  to  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made,, 
if  that  be  not  already  the  side  of  the  guide. 

957.  A  column  doubled  on  the  centre  at  company 


210  SCHOOL  OF  TllK  BATTALION— PART  V. 

distance  or  closed  in  mass,  may  be  formed  into  square 
according  to  tbe^ame  principles  as  a  simple  column. 

958.  When  a  battalion  is  ployed,  with  a  view  to  the 
square,  it  will  always  be  in  rear  of  the  right  or  left 
division,  in  order  that  it  may  be  able  to  con)mence 
firing,  pending  the  executi<in  of  the  movement.  The 
double  column  also,  affords  this  advantage,  and  being 
more  promptly  formed  fhan'any  otht-r,  it  will  habitu- 
ally be  employed,  unless  particular  circunistanees 
cause  a  different  formation  to  be  preferred. 

959.  A  battalion,  in  square,  will  never  use  anj'^  other 
than  the  fire  by  file  and  by  lank  ;  the  color  being  in 
the  line  of  file  closers,  its  guard  will  not  fall  back  as 
prescribed  No.  41,  it  will  fire  like  the  men  \if  the 
company  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

960.  If  the  square  be  formed  in  four  ranks,  the 
first  two  ranks  will  alone  execute  the  firings  pre- 
scribed above;  the  other  two  ranks  will  remain  either 
at  sh(»ulder  or  support  arms, 

961.  The  formation  of  the  square  being  often  ne- 
cessary in  war,  and  being  the  most  complicated  of  the 
manoeuvres,  it  will  be  as  frequently  icj  eated  as  the 
supposed  necessity .  may  require,  in  order  to  render 
its  mechanism  familiar  to  both  officers  and  men. 

962.  In  the  executicm  of  this  manoeuvre,  the  colo- 
nel will  carefully  observe  that  the  divers  movements 
which  it  involves  succeed  each  (»ther  without  lose  of 
time,  but  also  without  confusion;  .for,  if  the  rapidity 
of  cavalry  movements  requires  the  greatest  prompti- 
tude in  the  formation  of  squares,  so,  on  the  other 
hand,  precipitancy  always  results  in  disorder,  and  in 
no  circumstances  is  disorder  more  to  be  avoided. 


^^r 


^// 


J'i 


'! T 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  211 

963.  When  the  colonel  shall  vwish  to  cover. by 
gtirniishers  the  movements  of  a  column  preparing  to 
form  squiire,  he  will  detach  tor  this  purpose  one  or 
two  inner  jjl;it<K(ns  of  one  'of  the  interior  divisions  of 
the  column.  In  this  case,  the  exterior  platoons  of 
•this  division  and  the  following  subdivisions,  will,  ac- 
cording to  circumstances,  close  on  the  preceding  sub- 
division, in  suih  manner,  that  there  may  be  between 
them  (mly  the  distance  necessary  for  forming  into 
line. 


9o4.  When  the  oolonel  shall  be  ready  to  form 
square,  he  will,  in  order  to  recall  the  skirmishers, 
cause  to  the  color  to  be  s<iunded.  If  on  the  return 
of  the  skirmishers,  there  be  not  room  for  them  to 
form  into  line  of  battle,  they. will  double  on  the  outer 
platoons  of  their  respective  companies. 

Column  against  cavalry. 

965.  When  a  column  closed  in  mass  has  to  form 
square,  it  will  begin  by  taking  company  distance; 
but  if  so  suddenly  threatened  by  cavali-y  as  not  to 
allow  time  for  this  disposition,  it  will  be  formed  in 
the  following  manner: 

966.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Column  against  cavalry.     2.  MARCH. 

967.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading 
division  will  caution  it  to-  stand  fast  and  pass  behind 
the  rear  rank ;  in  the  interior  divisions  each  cap- 
tain will  promptly  designate  the  number  of  files  ne- 


212  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

cessary  to  close  the  interval  between  his  company  and 
the  one  in  fret nt  of  it.  The  captains  of  the  divisions 
next  to  the  one  in  rear,  in  addition  to  closing,  thef 
interval  in  front,  will  also  close  up  the  interval  which 
separates  this  division  from  the  last;  the  chief  of  the 
fourth  -division  wall  caution  it  to  face  abotrt,  and  its 
file  closers  will  pass  briskly  before  the  front  rank. 

968.  At  the  command  march,  the  guides  of  each 
division  will  place  themselves  rapidly  in  the  line  of 
file  closers.  The  first  division  will  stand  fast,  the 
fourth  will  face  about,  the  outer  file  of  each  of  these 
divisions  will  then  face  outwards ;  in  the  other  divi- 
sions the  files  designated  for  closing  the  intervals  will 
form  to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  but  in  the  divi- 
sion next  to  the  rearmost  one,  the  first  files  that 
come  into  line  wall  close  to  the  right  or  left  until 
they  join  the  rear  division.  The  files  of  each  cou> 
pany  which  remain  in  column  will  close  on  their  outer 
files,  formed  into  line,  in  order  to  create  a  vacant 
space  in  the  middle  of  the  column. 

969.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  column  against 
cavalry  will  be  formed  by  the  same  command  and 
means.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  and  fourth 
divisions  will  halt  and  the  latter  division  will  face 
about;  the  interior  divisions  will  conform  to  what 
has  been  prescribed  above. 

970.  The  battalion  being  no  longer  threatened  by 
cavalry,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Form  column.    2.  March. 

971.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  in  column 
will  close  to  the  left  and  right  to  make  room  for  those* 


SCHOOL.  OF  1  HE  BATTAT>ION— PART  V.  213 

•inline,  who  will  retake  their  places  in  column  by 
stepping  backwards,  except  those  closing  the  interval 
between  the  two  rear  divisions,  who  will  take  theit 
places  in  cdlumu  by  a  flank  movement.  The  fourth 
division  wall  face  about,  the  guides  will  resume  their 
places. 

97'-3.  If  the  colonel  should  be  so  pressed  m  not  to 
have  time  to  order  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  the  raen^ 
will  fix  them,  without  command  "or  signal,  at  the 
cautionary  command,  column  against  cavalry. 

973.  As  this  manoeuvre  is  often  used  in  war,  and 
with  decided  advantage,  the  colonel  will  frequently 
cause  it  to  be  executed,  in  order  io  render  it  familiar. 

Article  Fifteenth. 

The  Ratty. 

974.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  the  col- 
onel will  sometimes  cause  the  disperse  to  be  sounded, 
at  which  signal,  the  battalion  will  break  and  dis- 
perse. 

975.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  bat- 
talion, he  will  cause  to  the  color  to  be  sounded,  and 
at  the  same  time  place  two  markers  and  the  color* 
bearer  in  the  direction  he  may  wish  to  give  the  bat- 
talion. 

976.  Each  captain  will  rally  his  company  about 
six  paces  in  rear  of  the  place  it  is  to  occupy  in  line  of 
battle. 

977.  The  colonel  wilt  cause  the  color-company  to 
be   promptly  established  against    the   markers,  and 


214  SCnOOL  .OF  THE  BATTALION- PART  V. 

each,  company  by  thp  command  of  its  captain  will 
be  aligned  on  the  color-company  according  to  the 
|)rinciple8  heretofore  prescribed. 

978.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  bat- 
tali<m  in  column,  he  will  canse  the  assembly  to  be 
sounded,  and  place  i-wo  mai-kcrs  before  the  positi«»n 
to  be  occupied  by  the  first  company;  the  captain  of 
this  coinpany  will  rally  his  company  in  rear  of  the' 
two  markers,  aud  each  of  the  other  captains  will 
rally  his  compatiy  at  platoon  distai.ce,  behind  the  one 
which  should  precede  it  in  the  order  in  column. 

Article  Sixtee^ith. 

Rules  for  manceucring  by  the  rear  rank. 

979.  It  may  often  be  necessary  to  cause  a  battal- 
ion to  manoeuvre  by  the  rear  rank;  when  the* case 
presents  itself,  the  following  rules  will  be  obsei-ved. 

980.  The  battalion  , being  by  the  front  rank.  When 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  manoeuvi-e  by  the  rear  rank, 
he  will  command : 

I.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.      2.  Battalion.      3.  About 
—Face. 

981.  If  the  battalion  be  deployed,- this  movement 
will  be  executed  as  has  been  indicated  for  the  fire  by 
the  rear  rank. 

982.  If  the  battalion  be  in  column  by  company,  or 
by  platoon,  right  or  left  in  front,  the  chiefs  of  subdi- 
vision, to  take  their  Hew  places  in  column,  will  each 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  915 

pass  by  the  left  flank  of  his  subdivision,  and  the  file 
closers  by  the  right  flank ;  the  guides  will  place 
themselves  in  the  rear  rank. 

983.  Tf  the  column  be  formed  by  division,  the 
chiefs  of  division  will  each  pass  by  the  interval  in 
the  centre  of  his  division,  "and  the  file  closers  by  the 
outer  flanks  of  their  respective  companies;  the  junior 
captain  in  each  division  will  step  int<»  the  rear  rank, 
and  be  covered  in  the  front  rank  by  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company. 

984.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself 
abreast  with  the  leading  subdivision,  and  the  major 
abreast  with  the  rearmi  st  one. 

985.  The  battalion  being  faced  by  the  rear  rank, 
companies,  divisiorfs,  and  wings,  will  preserve  their 
prior  denominations  respectively.   " 

98G.  The  manoeuvres  by  the  rear  rank  will  be  ex- 
ecuted by  the  same  commands  and  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  if  the  batt«lion  faced  by^  the  front  rank  ;  but 
in  such  manner  that  when  th'e  battalion  shall  be 
brought  to  its  proper  front,  all  the  subdivisions  may 
find  themselves  in  their  regular  oifLer  from  right  to 
left. 

987.  According  to  this  principle,  when  a  column 
faced  by  the  rear  rank  is  deployed,  the  subdivisions 
which,  in  line  of  battle  by  the  froftt  rank,  ought  to 
find  themselves  oil  the  right  of  the  subdivision  on 
which  the  deployment  is  made,  will  face  to  the  left; 
and  those  which  ought  to  be  placed  on  its  left,  will 
face  to  the  right. 

988.  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  faced  by 
the  rear  rank,  is  to  be  pl«»yed  into  column,  the  col- 
onel will  announce,  in  the  commands,  left  or  right  in 
front,  according  as  it  may  be  intended  that  the  first 


216  SCHOOL  f!F  THE  BATTALI(»N— PART  V. 

or  last  subdivision  sljall  be  at  tbe  head  of  the.  column, 
because  the  first  subdivision  is  on  the  left,  and  the 
last  on  tlie  right  of  the  battalion  faced  by  the  rear 
rank.  The  column  by  the  rear  rank  will  take  the 
guide  to  the  right,  if  the  first  subdivision  be  in  front, 
and  to  the  left  in  the  reverse  case. 

989.  A  column,  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  will  be 
bx'ought  to  its  proper  front  by  the  means  heretofore 
prescribed.  If  the  column  be  formed  by  company, 
or  by  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  subdivision,  in  order  to 
take  thejr  new  places  in  column,  w^ill  pass  by  the 
left  of  subdivisions,  now  right,  and  the  file  closers  by 
the  right,  now  left. 


SCHOOL     OF     THE     BATTALION, 


ARRANGED    INTO    LESSONS. 


Lesson  First. 

Article  /. — Open  ranks,  No.  23; 

Article  If. — Close  ranks,  No.  29. 

Article  HI. — Manual  of  arms.  No.  30.      Loading  at 

will,  No.  31. 
Article  IV. — Different  fires,   by  the  front  rank,  No. 

39,  and  by  the  re*r  rtnk.  No.  54. 

Lemon  Second. 

Article  I. — Break  by  company  to  the  right,  No.  69,  or 
to  the  left.  No.  74. 

Article  II. — March  in  column  at  the  cadeLnced  step, 
a  considerable  distance.  No.  104.  Change  of  di- 
rection. No,  2^1.  Diminish  and  increase  front  in 
marching,  No.  198.     March  in  retreat.  No.  170. 


218  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Article  //A— Halt   the   column,   No.   239.     Form  it 

to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle,  No.  390. 

Execute  this  formation,  the  column  marching,  No. 

402. 
Article  IF. — Execute  the  countermarch,  and  repeat 

the  same  movements.  No.  35J. 
Article  V. — Form  C(»Iumn  into  line  of  battle,  i6  the 

right  or  left,  by  inversion.  No.  407.    • 


Lesson  Third. 


Article  I. — Break  by  company  to  the  rear  by  the 
right  or  left,  the  b.ittalion  being  at  a  halt, -No.  87, 
or  marching.  No.  94. 

Article  II. — March  in  the  r-oute  step,  No.  198.  Cause 
to  be  executed,  at  this  guit  and  in  double  quick 
time,  the  divers  movements  incident  to  the  column 
in  route,  and  cause  the  cadeuced  step  to  be  re- 
sumed. 

Article  ///.—  Form  the  column  forward  into  line,  of 
battle,  Nos.  440,  452,  faced  to  tiie  rear  into  line  of 
battle,  Nos.  406,  480,  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt, 
or  marching.  Form  the  column  forward  int(»  line, 
and  continue  the  march  in  this  order.  No.  456. 

Article  IF. — Form  the  column  on  the  right.  No.  416, 
or  the  left,  No.  432,  into  line  of  battle. 

Article  F. — March  by  the  flank.  No.  722,  and  form 
companies  into  line,  marching. 

Article  FI. — The  column  supposed  to  arrive  before, 
No.  175,  or  behind  the  line  of  brattle,  No.  184,  to 
pr«ilong  it  OB  that  line. 


SCHOOL  «  F  THE  BATTALION.  219 

Article  TV/,— Change  front  forward,  No.  743,  or  in 
rear,  No.  760,  on  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  in 
directions  perpendictflar  ov  oblique. 

Article  VIII. — March  by  the  right  flank.  No.  722,  or 
by  the  left  fla nit,  N(».  725.  Change  direction  by  file, 
No.  730.  Form  the  battalion  into  line  of  battle, 
on  the  right  or  left,  by.  file,  N<).  735. 

Article  /X— rPass  the  defile  in  retreat  by  the  right, 
No.  709,  or  by  the  flank.  No.  720. 


Lesson  Fourth. 


Article  I. — Break  by  divisiorf  to  the  rear,  by  the  right 
or  left,  the  battalion  being  ;it  a  halt  or  marching, 
No.  102. 

Article  II. — March  in  column  by  division.  No.  161. 
Diminish  and  increase  front  by  company.  No.  196. 

Article  III. — Close  the  column  to  half  distance  on  the 
headmost  or  the  reaimost  division,'  No.  278. 

Article  IV. — March  in  c<tlnnm  at  half  distance.  No. 
28J,  and  change  direction.  No.  2^7. 

Article  V. — The  cohimn  .being  at  half  distance,  to 
form  square  at  a  halt.  No.  817,  or  marching.  No 
837. 

Article  VI. — The  battalion  being  in  square  to  march 
to  the  front,  No.  854.  Halt  the  square.  No.  860. 
Form  column  to  march  to  the  front;  No  863,  or  in 
retreat,  No.  872.     Ee-form  the  square,  No.  875, 

Article  VII. — Reduce  the  square,  No.  883. 


220  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Article  Vin. — Close  the  column  in  mass  on  the  head- 
most or  rearmost  division^  No.  279.         '    ■ 

Article  IX. — March  in  column  closed  in  mass,  and 
change  direction  by  the  front  of  subdivisions,  No. 
288. 

Article  X.: — Form  the  column  against  cavalry,  No. 
966. 

Article  XL — Take  distances  by  the  head,  No.  323  and 
330,  or  on  rear  of  the  column,  No.  333,  the  column 
being  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

Article  XII. — The  column  being  by" company,  cause 
to  be  executed  the  movements  indicated  in  Nos.  3, 
4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  10  and  11  of  this  lesson.  The  C(.lumn 
being  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  to  form  to 
the  left  or  right,  into  line,  wheel,  on  the  rear  of  the 
column,  No.  502. 

Article  XIII.  —The  column  being  by  company,  form 
divisions  from  a  halt,  No.  364,  or  in  march,  No. 
376. 

Article  XIV. — The  column  being  by  division,  to  form 
it  to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle  at  a  halt, 
No.  40J,  or  in  march.  No.  402. 


Lesson  Fifth. 


Article  I. — ^Th'e  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  and 
at  a  halt,  to  ploy  it  by  division  into  column  closed, 
in  mass  on  the  right  division,  No.  119,  or  on  the 
left  division,  No.  141,  or  on  an  interior  division,  No. 
143,  the  right  or  left  iti  front.  Ploy  the  battalion 
marching  in  line  of  battle  on  the  right  or  left  divi- 
sion, No.  149. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE. BATTALION.  221 

Article  II. — Execute  the  countermarch,  No.  352.  * 

Article  III. — Change  direction  to  the  right,  No.  307, 
to  the  left,  No.  313,  by  the  flank  of  the  c'olumn.  . 

Article  IV. — Deploy  the  column  on  the  right  division. 
No.  514,  on  the  left  division,  No.  541,  or  on  any  in- 
terior division,  the  column  being  at  a  halt,  or 
marching,  No.  563. 

Article  V. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  column  by  divi- 
sion at  half  distance  marching.  No.  55ii. 

Article  VI. — Ploy  the  battalion  by  company,  closed  in 
mass,  and  form  it  on  the  right  or  left  into  line  ol 
battle,  No.  577.  ,  • 

Article  VII. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column, 
at  half  distance,  No.  777,  or  closed  in  mass.  No. 
703,  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt,  or  marching. 

Article  VIII. — March  in  this  order,  and  change  direc- 
tion. No.  794. 

Article  IX. — Deploy  the  column  at  a  halt.  No.  796,  or 
marching.  No.  800,  and  without  suspending  the 
march.  No.  802. 

Article  X. — The  double  colunin  being  at  half  dis- 
tance, form  it  into  line  of  battle  faced  to  the  right 
or  left.  No.  803,  the  column  being  in  march.  No.  807. 
Execute  the  same  movement  without  suspending 
the  march,  No.  810. 


222  SCHOOL  OF  THK  BATTALION. 

Artitle  XL — Perpendicular  or  parallel  squares;  the 
battalion  being  deployed,  Nos  SSS^,  895.  Oblique 
squares,  tbe  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  No. 
9:^8,  01  in  column,  No.  945.  Squares  in  four  ranks, 
No.  91J. 

Lesson  Sixth, 

Ariidc  /.—March  in  line  of  battle,  No.  587.  Halt 
the  battalion,  N(5.  635,  and  align  it,  Nxj.  640. 

Article  11. — Change  direction  in  line  of  battle,  ad- 
vancing. No.  652,  or  in  retreat,  No.  681.  Execute 
passage  of  obstacles,  No.  682. 

Ariidc  III. — Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle.  No 
623. 


Artide  IV. — Dispjerse  and  rally  the  battalion  in  line 
of  battle,  No.  974,  and  rally  the  battalion  in  col^ 
uran  by  company.  No.  978. 


REMARKS 

ON     THE     SCHOOL.    OF     THE     BA'1\TAL10N. 

In  every  course  of  instruction,  the  first  lesson  will 
be  executed  several  times  in  the  order  in  which  it  is 
arranged;  but  as  soon  as  the   battalion  shall  be  con- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  22a 

firmed  in  the  principles  nf  the  lesson,  the  fires.^U 
be  execute.U  after  the  advance  in  line,  and  after  th(B 
various  formations  into  line  of  battle,  and  into  square 
Paiticiilar  attention  will  be  ijiven  to  the  fire  by  file, 
which  is  that  principally  used  in  war. 

Every  lesson  of  this  school  will  be  executed  with 
the  utmost  precision ;  but  the  second,  which  com- 
prehends the  march  in  column,  and  the  march  in  line 
of  battle,  beina;  of  the  most  importance,  will  be 
the  oftenest  repeated,  especially  in  the  begiiming. 

Great  attention  ouffht,  nlso,  t(»  be  given  to  the 
fourth  lesson,  which  coijiprehends  tlie  march  in  col- 
umn by  division,  and  the  dispositiims  against  cavalr}'. 

The  successive  formations  will  sometimes  be  exe- 
cuted by  inversion. 

In  the  beginning,  the  march  in  column,  the  march 
in  line  of  battle,  and  the  march  by  the  flank,  will  bo 
executed  only  in  quick  time,  and  will  be  continued 
until  the  battalion  shall  have  become  well  estaolished 
in  the  cadence  of  this  step. 

The  non-cadenced  step  will  be  employed  in  this 
school  only  in  the  repetition  of  the  movements  in- 
cident to  a  C(tlumn  in  route,  or  when  great  celerity 
may  be  required. 

When  it  may  be  desired  to  give  the  men  relief, 
arms  may  be  supported,  if  at  a  halt,  or  marching  bv 
the  flank. 

In  marching  by  the  front,  arm«  may  be  shifted  to 
the  right  shoulder ;  but  not  in  the  march  in  line  of 
battle"  until  the  battalions  shall  be  well  instructed. 


224  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

After  arms  have  been  carried  for  som^  time  on  the 
right  shouldf  r,  they  may  be  shifted,  iu  likq^  manner, 
to  the  left  shoulder. 

When  a  battiili«n  is  manoeuvring,  its  movements 
will  be  covered  1^'  skirmishers. 

All  the  compiiuien  will  bo  exercised,  euccessively, 
iipthis  service. 

Wiien  a  battalion,  instructed  in  this  drill,  shall  be 
required  to  manoeuvre  in  the  evolutions  of  the  line, 
its  movements  will  be  regulated  by  the  instructions 
contained  in  the  third  volume  of  the  Tactics  for  heavy 
Infantry,  approved  by  the  War  Department,  April 
10th,  1835; 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 
Vol.  II. 

TITLE    FOURTH 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Page. 

Formation  of  the  battalion,  No.  1 , 5 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color-escort,  No.  4,  5 

Honors  paid  to  the  color,  No.  11, 7 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the 

battalion,  No.  14, 7 

PART  FIRST. 

Article  I.  —To  open  and  close  ranks,  No.  22..        9 

Article  II. — Manual  of  arms.  No.  30 11 

Article  III. — Loading  at  will,  and  the  firings. 
No.  31 11 

15* 


TABLE  <»F  CONTENTS. 


PART  SECOND. 

Page. 

Article  I. — To  break  by  company  to  the  right, 
No.  69.  Break  by  company  to  the  left,  No.  74. 
Break  by  division,  No.  75.  To  break  by  com- 
pany, marching.  No.  84. 18 

Article  II. — Break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies,  No.  87.  Break  to  the  rear 
by  the  right  or  left  of  companie^ii,  marching, 
No.  94.  Advance  or  retire  by  the  right  or  left 
of  companies.  No.  105.  Advance  or  retire  by 
the  right  or  left  of  companies,  marching.  No. 
110.  Advancing  or  retiring,  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies,  to  form  line  to  the  front. 
No.  113 23 

Article  III. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  close  col- 
umn on  the  first  division.  No.  119.  Ploy  the 
battalion  into  close  column  on  the  fourth  divi- 
sion. No.  141.  Ploy  the  battalion  into  close 
column  on  any  interior  division,  No.  143.  Bat- 
talion being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into  column  on 
the  first  division.  No.  149 29 

PART  THIRD. 


Article  I. — March  in  column  at  full  distance. 
No.  1G4.  Column  being  in  march,  to  execute 
the  about,  No.  170.     Column  arriving  in  front 


table  of  contents.  -227 

Page. 

of  the  line  of  bottle,  to  prolong  it  on  this  line, 
No.  175.  Column  arriving  behind  the  line  of 
battlt',  to  prolong  it  on  this  line.  No.  184.  Col- 
umn arriving  on  the  right  or  the  left  of  the  line 
of  b.ittle,  to  prohtng  it  on  this  line,  No.  188. 
•  Manner  of  prolonging  a  line  by  markers,  No. 
189 37 

Article  II.— Column  in  route,  No.  198 48 

Article  III. — Change  of  direction  in  column  at 
full  distance,  No.  231 55 

Article  IV.— Halt  the  column.  No.  239 57 

Article  V. — Close  the  column  to  half  distance, 
or  in  mass.  No.  252.  Close  the  column  on  the 
eighth  company,  No.  267.  Execute  this  move- 
ment,  marching.  No.  273 60 

Article  VI. — March  in  column  at  half  distance, 
or  closed  in  mass.  No.  281 65 

Article  VII. — Change  direction  in  column  at 
half  distance,  No.  287 66 

Article  VIII. — Change  direction  of  a  column 
closed  in  mass,  marching,  No.  288.  Change 
direction  of  a  column,  ch)sed  iu  mass,  from  a 
halt.  No.  306 67 

Article  IX.— Take  distances  by  the  head  of  the 
colunm,  No.  323.  Take  distances  by  the  rear 
of  the  column.  No  3.33.  Take  distances  on  the 
head  of  the  column.  No.  341 73 

Article  X. — Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full 

color  half  distance.  No.  351  Countermarch  of  a 
umn  cloi^ed  in  mn ss,  No.  352 79 


228        table  of  contents. 

Page. 

Article  XI. — Being  in  column  by  company, 
closed  in  mass,  to  form  divisions,  No.  364.  To 
form  divisions,  marching,  No.  37G 81 


PART  FOURTH. 


Article  I. — Manner  of  determining  the  line  of 
battle,No.  389 87 

Article  II. — To  form  a  column,  at  full^distance, 
to  the  left  into  line  of  battle.  No.  390.  To  form 
a  column  to  the  right  i  to  line  of  battle.  No.  :^99. 
A  column  being  in  march,  to  form  it  into  line  of 
battle.  No.  402,  To  form  a  column  into  line  of 
battle,  and  to  move  it  forvi^ard,  No.  403.  By  in- 
version to  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle, 
No.  407.  Column  at  full  distance,  to  form  it  on 
the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle.  No.  414. 
Column  at  full  distance,  forward  into  line  of 
battle,  No.  440.  Foru^ard  into  line  of  battle, 
marching,  No.  452.  Column  at  full  distance, 
faced  to  the  rear  into  line  of  battle,  No.  466. 
Execute  this  movement,  marching,  No.  479...     87 

Article  III. — Formation  in  line  of  battle  by 
two  movements,  No.  485 110 

Article  IV. — Different  modes  of  forming  col- 
umn at  half  distance,  to  the  left  or  right,  into 
line  of  battle,  No.  501.  By  the  rear  of  column, 
left  or  right,  into  line,  wheel,  No.  503.     Column 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  229 

Page. 

at  half  distance,  on  the  right  or  left,  into  line. 
No  507.  Column,  at  half  distance,  forward 
into  line.  No.  508.     Column,  at  half  distance, 

faced  to  the  rear  into  line.  No.  509. 113 

Article  V. — Deployment  of  columns  closed  in 
mass,  No.  510.  Deployment  on  the  first  divi- 
sion. No.  514.  To  deploy,  whilst  marching,  on 
the  first  division,  No.  532.  To  deploy  without 
halting  the  column,  and  to  continue  marching, 
No.  536.  To  deploy  on  the  fourth  division,  No. 
541.  To  deploy,  whilst  marching,  on  the  fourth 
division,  No.  556.  To  deploy  on  an  interior  di- 
vision, No.  563.  To  deploy,  whilst  rairching, 
on  an  interior  division,  No.  567. '. 116 


PART  FIFTH. 


Article  L— To  advance  in  line  of  battle.  No.  587.  132 

Article  IT. — Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle, 
No.  623 141 

Article  III. — To  halt  the  battalion,  marching 
in  line  of  battle,  and  to  align  it.  No.  635 143 

Article  IV. — Change  of  direction  in  marching 
in  line  of  battle.  No.  652 146 

Article  V. — To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, No.  664 : 149 

Article  VI. — To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in 
retreat,  and  to  face  it  to  the  front,     No.  676..   151 


230  table  of  contents. 

Pagi:. 

Article  VII.— Chanjire  of  direction,  in  n);ireh- 
ing  in  retreat,  No.  681 152 

Article  VIIl. — Passage  of  obstacles,  advanc- 
ii  g  and  retreating,  No.  682 153 

Article  IX. — To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the 
right  or  lel't  flank,  No.  710 159 

Article  X.— To  march  by  the  flank,  No.  722..   162 

Article  XI.— To  form  the  battalion  on  the  right 
or  left,  by  file,  into  line  of  battle.  No.  735 164 

Article  XII. — Change  of  front  perpendicularly 
forward,  No.  743.  Change  front  foiward  on 
the  first  company,  marching.  No.  754.  Change 
of  front  perpendicularly  to  the  rear.  No.  76J . .    165 

Article  XIII. — To  ploy  the  battalion  into  col- 
umn, doubled  on  the  centre.  No.  776.  To  foriji 
double  column,  marching,  No.  787.  Deployment 
of  the  double  column,  faced  to  the  front.  No.  7i)6. 
Deployment  of  the  double  column  marching, 
No.  800.  To  form  the  double  column  into  line 
of  battle,  faced  to  the  right  or  left.  No.  803.  To 
form  the  double  column  into  line  of  battle,  fac- 
ed to  the  right  or  left,  marching,  No.  807 172 

Article  XIV. — Dispositions  against  cavalry  No. 
817.     A  column  being  in  march  at  full  distance, 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  231 

Page. 

to  form  square,  No.  837.  If  the  colimin  be  closed 
in  mass,  to  make  dispositions  to  form  square.  No. 
847.  The  l)attalion  being  in  square,  to  move  it  in 
advance  by  one  of  its  fronts.  No.  854.     To  halt 
the   square,  No.  8Gii.     The  battalion  being  in 
S([uare,  to  form  column  to  n)arch  to  the  front,  a 
distance  greater  tlnin  thirty  paces,  No.  863.  To 
march  the  square  in  retreat  a  greater  distance 
than  thirty  paces,  No  872.   The  battalion  being 
ill  square,  to  march  it  in  advance,  or  in  retreat,  a 
distance  less  than  thirty  paces.  No.  87(3.     The 
column  marching  to  the  front,  to  march  it  in  re- 
treat. No.  879.  The  colunm  marching  in  retreat, 
to  march  it  to  the  front.  No.  88J .    To  reduce  the 
square,  No.  883.  T(tf(u-m  scpiarefrom  line  of  bat- 
tle. No.   885.     Perpendicular  square.  No.  888. 
Perpendicular  square,  marching,  No.  890.     To 
form  square  by  double  column,  No.  892.  To  form 
square   by  double  c<»lunm,  marching,  No.  894. 
Obsei'vations  relative  to  the  formatifui  of  squares 
in    two    ranks.  No.  896.      The   c(»lumn  being 
formed  of  four  divisions,  to  place  the  inner  pla- 
toons of  tlie  third  division  m  reserve.  No.  898. 
Squares  in  four  ranks.  No.  910.     The  square 
formed  in  four  ranks  being  reduced,  and  at  a  halt, 
to  fiu-ni  the  battalion  into  two  ranks.  No.  916. 
The  colunm  being  in  march  with  divisions  form- 
ed in  four  ranks,  to  re-form  it  into  two  ranks.  No. 
920.    To  form  sqtuire  in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the 
flank  divisions.  No.  923.     Form  square  in  four 
ranks  on  the  first  division,  marching.  No.  928. 
Form  perpendicular  square  in  four  ranks,  by 
double  column,  No.  931.     Form  perpendicular 


•23^  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Page. 

square  in  four  rauks,  by  double  column,  march- 
ing, No.  935.  Oblique  square.  No.  938.  Oblique 
square,  being  in  column,  No.  945.  Column 
against  cavalry,  No.  965.  The  battalion  being  no 
longer  threatened  by  cavalry,  to  form  column,- 

No.  970 182 

Article  XV.— The  rally.  No.  974 213 

Article  XYL— Rules  for  manoeuvring  by  the 
rear  rank,  No.  979 214 


THE    END. 


23- 


/ 


\ 


o 


'^1^' 


/•v 


